N79E715 Datasheet
Nuvoton 8051-based Microcontroller
N79E715
Datasheet
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 1 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table of Contents
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................ 5
2
FEATURES .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
3
PARTS INFORMATION LIST ............................................................................................................................ 8
4
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................................................. 9
5
PIN CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................10
6
MEMORY ORGANIZATION .............................................................................................................................15
6.1
APROM Flash Memory ........................................................................................................................16
6.2
LDROM Flash Memory ........................................................................................................................16
6.3
CONFIG-bits ..........................................................................................................................................16
6.4
On-chip Non-volatile Data Flash .........................................................................................................16
6.5
On-chip XRAM.......................................................................................................................................18
6.6
On-chip scratch-pad RAM and SFR ...................................................................................................18
6.7
Working Registers .................................................................................................................................19
6.8
Bit-addressable Locations ...................................................................................................................20
6.9
Stack .......................................................................................................................................................20
7
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER (SFR) .......................................................................................................21
8
GENERAL 80C51 SYSTEM CONTROL .........................................................................................................25
9
I/O PORT STRUCTURE AND OPERATION..................................................................................................29
9.1
Quasi-Bidirectional Output Configuration ..........................................................................................29
9.1.1 Read-Modify-Write ..................................................................................................................30
9.2
Open Drain Output Configuration .......................................................................................................31
9.3
Push-Pull Output Configuration ..........................................................................................................31
9.4
Input Only Configuration ......................................................................................................................32
10
TIMERS/COUNTERS ........................................................................................................................................36
10.1 Timers/Counters 0 and 1 .....................................................................................................................36
10.1.1 Mode 0 (13-bit Timer) ...........................................................................................................40
10.1.2 Mode 1 (16-bit Timer) ...........................................................................................................41
10.1.3 Mode 2 (8-bit Auto-Reload Timer) ......................................................................................41
10.1.4 Mode 3 (Two Separate 8-bit Timers) .................................................................................42
10.2 Timer/Counter 2 ....................................................................................................................................43
10.2.1 Input Capture Mode ..............................................................................................................45
10.2.2 Auto-reload Mode ..................................................................................................................49
10.2.3 Compare Mode ......................................................................................................................50
11
WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT) .............................................................................................................................51
11.1 Functional Description ..........................................................................................................................51
11.2 Applications of Watchdog Timer Reset..............................................................................................54
11.3 Applications of Watchdog Timer Interrupt .........................................................................................55
12
SERIAL PORT (UART) ......................................................................................................................................57
12.1 Mode 0 ....................................................................................................................................................59
12.2 Mode 1 ....................................................................................................................................................61
12.3 Mode 2 ....................................................................................................................................................63
12.4 Mode 3 ....................................................................................................................................................65
12.5 Baud Rates ............................................................................................................................................67
12.6 Framing Error Detection .......................................................................................................................68
12.7 Multiprocessor Communication ...........................................................................................................68
12.8 Automatic Address Recognition ..........................................................................................................69
13
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) ....................................................................................................72
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 2 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
Features .................................................................................................................................................72
Functional Description ..........................................................................................................................72
SPI Control Registers ...........................................................................................................................75
Operating Modes ...................................................................................................................................78
13.4.1 Master Mode ..........................................................................................................................78
13.4.2 Slave Mode ............................................................................................................................78
13.5 Clock Formats and Data Transfer ......................................................................................................79
13.6 Slave Select Pin Configuration ...........................................................................................................81
13.7 Mode Fault Detection ...........................................................................................................................82
13.8 Write Collision Error ..............................................................................................................................82
13.9 Overrun Error .........................................................................................................................................82
13.10 SPI Interrupts ........................................................................................................................................83
14
KEYBOARD INTERRUPT (KBI).......................................................................................................................85
15
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) ................................................................................................89
16
INTER-INTEGRATED CIRCUIT (I C) .............................................................................................................95
16.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................95
16.2 Functional Description ..........................................................................................................................95
16.2.1 START and STOP Conditions .............................................................................................96
16.2.2 7-bit Address with Data Format...........................................................................................97
16.2.3 Acknowledge ..........................................................................................................................98
16.2.4 Arbitration ...............................................................................................................................99
2
16.3 Control Registers of I C .....................................................................................................................100
16.4 Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................103
16.4.1 Master Transmitter Mode ...................................................................................................103
16.4.2 Master Receiver Mode .......................................................................................................105
16.4.3 Slave Receiver Mode..........................................................................................................106
16.4.4 Slave Transmitter Mode .....................................................................................................107
16.4.5 General Call .........................................................................................................................108
16.4.6 Miscellaneous States ..........................................................................................................108
2
16.5 Typical Structure of I C Interrupt Service Routine .........................................................................109
2
16.6 I C Time-out .........................................................................................................................................113
2
16.7 I C Interrupts ........................................................................................................................................113
17
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED (PWM) ..........................................................................................................115
17.1 Features ...............................................................................................................................................115
17.2 Functional Description ........................................................................................................................115
18
TIMED ACCESS PROTECTION (TA) ...........................................................................................................125
19
INTERRUPT SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................127
19.1 Interrupt Sources .................................................................................................................................127
19.2 Priority Level Structure .......................................................................................................................129
19.3 Interrupt Response Time ...................................................................................................................133
19.4 SFR of Interrupt ...................................................................................................................................133
20
IN SYSTEM PROGRAMMING (ISP) .............................................................................................................139
20.1 ISP Procedure .....................................................................................................................................139
20.2 ISP Command Table ..........................................................................................................................143
20.3 Access Table of ISP Programming ..................................................................................................144
20.4 ISP User Guide ...................................................................................................................................144
20.5 ISP Demo Code ..................................................................................................................................145
21
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................................148
21.1 Idle Mode ..............................................................................................................................................148
21.2 Power-down Mode ..............................................................................................................................149
2
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 3 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
22
CLOCK SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................................151
22.1 On-Chip RC Oscillators ......................................................................................................................153
22.2 Crystal/Resonator ...............................................................................................................................153
23
POWER MONITORING ...................................................................................................................................154
23.1 Power-on Detection ............................................................................................................................154
23.2 Brown-out Detection ...........................................................................................................................154
24
RESET CONDITIONS .....................................................................................................................................157
24.1 Power-on Reset ...................................................................................................................................157
24.2 BOD Reset ...........................................................................................................................................158
24.3 RST Pin Reset .....................................................................................................................................159
24.4 Watchdog Timer Reset ......................................................................................................................159
24.5 Software Reset ....................................................................................................................................160
24.6 Boot Selection .....................................................................................................................................161
24.7 Reset State ..........................................................................................................................................162
25
CONFIG BITS (CONFIG) ................................................................................................................................164
25.1 CONFIG0 .............................................................................................................................................164
25.2 CONFIG1 .............................................................................................................................................165
25.3 CONFIG2 .............................................................................................................................................166
25.4 CONFIG3 .............................................................................................................................................167
25.5 CONFIG4 .............................................................................................................................................168
26
INSTRUCTION SETS ......................................................................................................................................169
27
IN-CIRCUIT PROGRAM (ICP) .......................................................................................................................173
28
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .............................................................................................................175
28.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ...............................................................................................................175
28.2 DC Electrical Characteristics .............................................................................................................175
28.3 Analog Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................................................180
28.3.1 Characteristics of 10-bits SAR-ADC .................................................................................180
28.3.2 Characteristics of 4 ~ 24 MHz Crystal ..............................................................................181
28.3.3 Characteristics of HIRC ......................................................................................................181
28.3.4 Characteristics of LIRC ......................................................................................................182
29
APPLICATION CIRCUIT FOR EMC IMMUNITY .........................................................................................183
30
PACKAGE DIMENSIONS ...............................................................................................................................184
30.1 28-pin SOP - 300 mil ..........................................................................................................................184
30.2 28-pin TSSOP - 4.4X9.7 mm.............................................................................................................185
30.3 20-pin SOP - 300 mil ..........................................................................................................................186
30.4 20-pin TSSOP - 4.4X6.5mm ..............................................................................................................187
30.5 16-pin SOP - 150 mil ..........................................................................................................................188
31
REVISION HISTORY .......................................................................................................................................189
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 4 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
1 General Description
The N79E715 8-bit Turbo 51 (4T Mode) microcontroller is embedded with 16 Kbytes Flash EPROM
that can be programmed through universal hardware writer, serial ICP (In Circuit Program)
programmer, and software ISP function. The instruction sets of the N79E715 are fully compatible with
the standard 8052. The N79E715 contains 16 Kbytes
[1]
program memory (APROM) and 2 Kbytes
Load Flash EPROM (LDROM) memory, 256 bytes direct and indirect RAM, 256 bytes XRAM; 25 I/O
with bit-addressable I/O ports; two 16-bit timers/counters; 8-channel multiplexed 10-bit A/D converter;
2
4-channel 10-bit PWM; three serial ports including a SPI, I C and an enhanced full duplex serial port;
2-level BOD voltage detection/reset and power-on reset (POR). The N79E715 also supports internal
RC oscillator 22.1184 MHz that is factory trimmed to ± 1% at room temperature and VDD = 5V.
These peripherals are supported by 14 sources of four-level interrupt capability. To facilitate
programming and verification, the Flash EPROM inside the N79E715 allows the program memory to
be programming and read electronically. The code is once confirmed. Thus the user can protect the
code for security.
The N79E715 microcontroller, featuring wide operating voltage range, built-in rich analog and digital
peripherals and non-volatile Flash memory, is widely suitable for general control and home
appliances.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 5 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
2 Features
Core
Fully static design 8-bit Turbo 51 (4T) CMOS microcontroller
Instruction sets fully compatible with the MCS-51
Operating voltage range
VDD = 2.4V to 5.5V at FSYS = 4~ 24 MHz
Operating temperature range
-40C ~ +85C
Clock System
High-speed external oscillator 4~ 24 MHz crystal and resonator
High-speed internal RC oscillator 22.1184 MHz
Flexible CPU clock source configurable by CONFIG-bits
8-bit Programmable CPU clock divider(DIVM)
On-chip Memory
100,000 erase/write cycles
16 Kbytes shared by APROM and Data Flash depending on CONFIG-bits definitions
APROM, LDROM and Data Flash security protection
Flash page size as 128 bytes
256 bytes of on-chip direct/indirect RAM
256 bytes of XRAM, accessed by MOVX instruction
On-chip Flash programmed through
Parallel H/W Writer mode
Serial In-Circuit-Program mode (ICP)
Software Implemented ISP (In-System-Program)
I/O Ports
Up to 25 I/O pins
All I/O pin besides P1.2 and P1.3 support 4 software configurable output modes
Software selectable TTL or Schmitt trigger input type per port
14 interrupt sources with four levels of priority
LED drive capability 38 mA on P10, P11, P14, P16, P17
LED drive capability 20 mA on port 0, 2, 3 pins
Timer/Counter
Two sets of 16-bit Timers/Counters
One 16-bit Timer with three channel of input captures
Watchdog Timer
Programmable Watchdog 6-bit Timer with divider 256
Clock source supported by low-speed internal RC oscillator
2
Serial ports (UART, SPI, I C)
One set of enhanced full duplex UART port with framing error detection and automatic
address recognition.
Software switches two groups of UART pins
One set of SPI with master/slave capability; software switches two groups of SPI pins
2
One set of I C with master/slave capability
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 6 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
PWM
4 channels 10-bit PWM outputs with one brake/fault input
KBI
8-keypad interrupt inputs (KBI) with 8 falling/rising/both-edge detection pins selected by
software
ADC
10-bit A/D converter
Up to 150 ksps (sample per second)
8 analog input channels
Brown-out Detector
2-level (3.8V/2.7V) BOD detector
Supports interrupt and reset options
POR (Power-on Reset)
Threshold voltage level as 2.0V
Built-in power management
Idle mode
Power-down mode with optionally enabled WDT functions
Strong ESD and EFT immunity
Development Tools
Hardware writer
ICP programmer
ISP update APROM by UART port
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 7 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
3 Parts Information List
Table 3-1 Lead Free (RoHS) Parts Information List
PART NO.
APROM
LDROM
RAM
DATA FLASH
PACKAGE
N79E715AS28
16KB
2KB
512B
Share APROM
SOP-28 Pin
N79E715AS20
16KB
2KB
512B
Share APROM
SOP-20 Pin
N79E715AS16
16KB
2KB
512B
Share APROM
SOP-16 Pin
N79E715AT28
16KB
2KB
512B
Share APROM
TSSOP-28 Pin
N79E715AT20
16KB
2KB
512B
Share APROM
TSSOP-20 Pin
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 8 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
4 Block Diagram
P1.0
|
P0.0
Port 1
Latch
Port 1
ACC
Port 0
Latch
B
Port 0
P1.7
|
P0.7
T1 Register
T2 Register
DPTR
Interrupt
Stack
Pointer
PSW
ALU
Input
Capture/
Timer 2
DPTR1
Timer Reg.
PC
Timer
1
Incrementor
SFR & RAM
Address
Timer
0
Flash EPROM
ADC
UART
Instruction
Decoder
&
Sequencer
256 bytes
RAM & SFR
I2C, SPI
KBI
256 XRAM
PWM
P2.0
On-Chip
RC
Oscillator
Port 2
Latch
Port 2
Bus & Lock
Controller
Port 3
Latch
Port 3
Oscillator
XTAL1
XTAL2
P2.7
P3.0
|
P3.1
Power Control
&
Power Monitor
Reset Block
On-Chip
RC
10 KHz
|
Watchdog Timer
RST
VDD
GND
Figure 4-1 N79E715 Function Block Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 9 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
5 Pin Configuration
IC2, P2.0
1
28
P2.7, RXD2[1]
P2.1
2
27
P2.6, ADC7, TXD2[1]
SPICLK, KB0, PWM3, P0.0
3
26
P0.1, ADC0, PWM0, KB1
ICPCLK, MOSI, PWM2, P1.7
4
25
P0.2, ADC1, BRAKE, KB2
ICPDAT, MISO, PWM1, P1.6
5
24
P0.3, ADC2, KB3
RST
6
23
P0.4, ADC3, KB4
VSS
7
22
P0.5, ADC4, KB5
XTAL1, P3.1
8
21
VDD
XTAL2, CLKOUT, P3.0
9
20
P0.6, ADC5, KB6
SS, STADC, INT1, P1.4
10
19
P0.7, ADC6 T1, KB7, IC1
SDA, INT0, P1.3
11
18
P1.0, TXD
IC0, SCL, T0, P1.2
12
17
P1.1, RXD
MOSI2 , P2.2
13
16
P2.5, SPICLK2[2]
MISO2[2], P2.3
14
15
P2.4, SS2[2]
[2]
N79E715AT28
[1] These pins are switched from RXD2 and TXD2 by S/W setting
[2] These pins are switched from MOSI2, MISO2, /SS2 and SPICLK2 by S/W setting.
Figure 5-1 TSSOP 28-pin Assignment
SPICLK, KB0, PWM3, P0.0
1
20
P0.1, ADC0, PWM0, KB1
ICPCLK, MOSI, PWM2, P1.7
2
19
P0.2, ADC1, BRAKE, KB2
ICPDATA, MISO, PWM1, P1.6
3
18
P0.3, ADC2, KB3
RST
4
17
P0.4, ADC3, KB4
VSS
5
16
P0.5, ADC4, KB5
XTAL1, P3.1
6
15
VDD
XTAL2, CLKOUT, P3.0
7
14
P0.6, ADC5, KB6
SS, STADC, INT1, P1.4
8
13
P0.7, ADC6 T1, KB7, IC1
SDA, INT0, P1.3
9
12
P1.0, TXD
IC0, SCL, T0, P1.2
10
11
P1.1, RXD
N79E715AT20
Figure 5-2 TSSOP 20-pin Assignment
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 10 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
IC2, P2.0
1
28
P2.7, RXD2[1]
P2.1
2
27
P2.6, ADC7, TXD2[1]
SPICLK, KB0, PWM3, P0.0
3
26
P0.1, ADC0, PWM0, KB1
ICPCLK, MOSI, PWM2, P1.7
4
25
P0.2, ADC1, BRAKE, KB2
ICPDAT, MISO, PWM1, P1.6
5
24
P0.3, ADC2, KB3
RST
6
23
P0.4, ADC3, KB4
VSS
7
22
P0.5, ADC4, KB5
XTAL1, P3.1
8
21
VDD
XTAL2, CLKOUT, P3.0
9
20
P0.6, ADC5, KB6
SS, STADC, INT1, P1.4
10
19
P0.7, ADC6 T1, KB7, IC1
SDA, INT0, P1.3
11
18
P1.0, TXD
IC0, SCL, T0, P1.2
12
17
P1.1, RXD
MOSI2 , P2.2
13
16
P2.5, SPICLK2[2]
MISO2[2], P2.3
14
15
P2.4, SS2[2]
[2]
N79E715AS28
[1] These pins are switched from RXD2 and TXD2 by S/W setting
[2] These pins are switched from MOSI2, MISO2, /SS2 and SPICLK2 by S/W setting.
Figure 5-3 SOP 28-pin Assignment
SPICLK, KB0, PWM3, P0.0
1
20
P0.1, ADC0, PWM0, KB1
ICPCLK, MOSI, PWM2, P1.7
2
19
P0.2, ADC1, BRAKE, KB2
ICPDATA, MISO, PWM1, P1.6
3
18
P0.3, ADC2, KB3
RST
4
17
P0.4, ADC3, KB4
VSS
5
16
P0.5, ADC4, KB5
XTAL1, P3.1
6
15
VDD
XTAL2, CLKOUT, P3.0
7
14
P0.6, ADC5, KB6
SS, STADC, INT1, P1.4
8
13
P0.7, ADC6 T1, KB7, IC1
SDA, INT0, P1.3
9
12
P1.0, TXD
IC0, SCL, T0, P1.2
10
11
P1.1, RXD
N79E715AS20
Figure 5-4 SOP 20-pin Assignment
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 11 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
KB0, PWM3, P0.0
1
16
P0.1, ADC0, PWM0, KB1
ICPCLK, PWM2, P1.7
2
15
P0.2, ADC1, BRAKE, KB2
ICPDATA, PWM1, P1.6
3
14
P0.3, ADC2, KB3
RST
4
13
P0.4, ADC3, KB4
VSS
5
12
VDD
XTAL1, P3.1
6
11
P1.0, TXD
XTAL2, CLKOUT, P3.0
7
10
P1.1, RXD
SDA, INT0, P1.3
8
9
P1.2, IC0, SCL, T0
N79E715AS16
Figure 5-5 SOP 16-pin Assignment
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 12 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 5–1 Pin Description
Pin No.
Alternate Function
Symb
o
l
Type
Description
TSSOP28
/SOP28
TSSOP20
/SOP20
SOP16
21
15
12
VDD
P
POWER SUPPLY: Supply voltage VDD for operation.
7
5
5
VSS
P
GROUND: Ground potential
6
4
4
/RST
I
(ST)
3
1
1
P0.0
PWM3
26
20
16
P0.1
PWM0
ADC0
KB1
I/O
25
15
19
P0.2
BRAKE
ADC1
KB2
I/O
1
2
3
KB0
SPICLK
I/O
RESET: Chip reset pin that is low active.
PORT0: Port 0 has 4-type I/O port. Its multifunction pins are
for PWM0, PWM3, T1, BRAKE, SPICLK, ADC0~ADC6 and
KB0 ~ KB7.
ADC0 ~ADC6: ADC channel input.
KB0 ~ KB7: Keyboard Input
The PWM0 and PWM3 is PWM output channel.
24
14
18
P0.3
ADC2
KB3
I/O
23
13
17
P0.4
ADC3
KB4
I/O
22
-
16
P0.5
ADC4
KB5
I/O
20
-
14
P0.6
ADC5
KB6
I/O
19
-
13
P0.7
T1
ADC6
KB7
18
11
12
P1.0
TXD
I/O
17
10
11
P1.1
RXD
I/O
12
9
10
P1.2
T0
T1: Timer 1 External Input
SPICLK: SPI-1 clock pin
11
8
9
P1.3
IC1
SCL
/INT0
IC0
SDA
I/O
D
D
PORT1: Port 1 has 4-type I/O port. Its multifunction pins are
for TXD, RXD, T0, /INT0, /INT1, SCL, SDA, STADC, ICPDAT,
ICPCLK and /SS, MISO, MOSI.
The TXD and RXD are UART port
The SCL and SDA are I2C function with open-drain port.
The ICPDAT and ICPCLK are ICP (In Circuit Programming)
function pins.
The /SS, MISO, MOSI are SPI-1 function pins.
10
-
8
P1.4
/INT1
5
3
3
P1.6
PWM1
4
2
2
P1.7
PWM2
1
-
-
P2.0
2
-
-
P2.1
13
-
-
P2.2
STADC
/SS
I/O
ICPDAT
MISO
I/O
ICPCLK
MOSI
I/O
IC2
I/O
The PWM1 and PWM2 are PWM output channel
T0: Timer 0 External Input
Jan. 6, 2016
MOSI2
IC0/1: Input Capture pin
STADC: ADC trigger by external pin
PORT2: Port 2 has 4-type I/O port. Its multifunction pins are
for T2, ADC7, TXD2, RXD2 and MOSI2, MISO2, /SS2,
SPICLK2, IC2
I/O
The TXD2 and RXD2 are UART port by software switch form
TXD1 and RXD1.
I/O
The MOSI2, MISO2, /SS2 and SPICLK2 are SPI-2 function
Page 13 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 5–1 Pin Description
Pin No.
Alternate Function
Symb
TSSOP28
/SOP28
TSSOP20
/SOP20
SOP16
14
-
-
P2.3
15
-
-
P2.4
1
o
l
2
Type
Description
MISO2
I/O
pins. The SPI-2 ports are by software switched from SPI-1
port.
/SS2
I/O
3
ADC7: ADC channel input.
IC2: Input Capture pin
SPICLK
16
-
-
P2.5
27
-
-
P2.6
TXD2
28
-
-
P2.7
RXD2
9
7
7
P3.0
XTAL2
ADC7
I/O
2
I/O
I/O
CLKOUT
I/O
PORT3: Port 3 has 4-type I/O port. Its multifunction pins are
for XTAL1, XTAL2 and CLKOUT,
CLKOUT: FHIRC/4 output pin.
8
6
6
P3.1
XTAL1
I/O
XTAL2: This is the output pin from the internal inverting
amplifier. It emits the inverted signal of XTAL2.
XTAL1: This is the output pin from the internal inverting
amplifier. It emits the inverted signal of XTAL1.
[1] I/O type description － I: input, O: output, I/O: quasi bi-direction, D: open-drain, P: power pins, ST: Schmitt trigger.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 14 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
6 Memory Organization
The N79E715 has embedded Flash EPROM including 16 Kbytes Application Program Flash memory
(APROM), fixed 2 Kbytes Load ROM Flash memory (LDROM) and CONFIG-bits. The N79E715 also
provides 256 bytes of on-chip direct/indirect RAM and 256 bytes of XRAM accessed by MOVX
instruction.
APROM block and Data Flash block comprise the 16 Kbytes embedded Flash. The block size is
CONFIG-bits/software configurable.
The N79E715 is built with a CMOS page-erase. The page-erase operation erases all bytes within a
page of 128 bytes.
00FFH
0000H
Config-bits
0FFH
Data Flash
128 bytes/page
256 Bytes
on-chip XRAM
Page n =128B
07FFH
LDROM
0000H
000H
3FFFH
XRAM accessed by MOVX
instruction
Data Flash
CHBDA
Or
SHBDA
Page 1 = 128B
16KB
FFH
Indirect
RAM
Addressing
Page 0 = 128B
Data Flash Memory Area
16K Bytes
APROM
80H
7FH
16KB: N79E715
00H
0000H
SFR
Direct
Addressing
Only
Direct
&
Indirect
RAM
Addressing
Direct/Indirect RAM
Accessed by MOV instruction
Program Memory Space
Flash Type
Data Memory Space
SRAM Type
Figure 6-1 N79E715 Memory Map
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 15 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
6.1 APROM Flash Memory
The N79E715 has 16 Kbytes on-chip Program Memory. All instructions are fetched for execution from
this memory area. The MOVC instruction can also read this memory region.
The user application program is located in APROM. When CPU boots from APROM (CHPCON.BS=0),
CPU starts executing the program from address 0000H. If the value of program counter (PC) is over
the space of APROM, CPU will execute NOP operand and program counter increases one by one
until PC reaches 3FFFH then it wraparounds to address 0000H of APROM, the CPU executes the
application program again.
6.2
LDROM Flash Memory
The N79E715 has 2 Kbytes LDROM. User may develop the ISP function in LDROM for updating
application program or Data Flash. Similarly, APROM can also re-program LDROM and Data Flash.
The start address of LDROM is at 0000H corresponding to the physical address of the Flash memory.
However, when CPU runs in LDROM, CPU automatically re-vectors the LDROM start address to
0000H, therefore user program regards the LDROM as an independent program memory, meanwhile,
with all interrupt vectors that CPU provides.
6.3
CONFIG-bits
There are several bytes of CONFIG-bits located CONFIG-bits block. The CONFIG-bits define the CPU
initial setting after power up or reset. Only hardware parallel writer or hardware ICP writer can
erase/program CONFIG-bits. ISP program in LDROM can also erase/program CONFIG-bits.
6.4
On-chip Non-volatile Data Flash
The N79E715 additionally has non-volatile Data Flash, which is non-volatile so that it remains its
content even after the power is off. Therefore, in general application the user can write or read data
which rules as parameters or constants. By the software path, SP mode can erase, written, or read the
Data Flash only. Of course, hardware with parallel Programmer/Writer or ICP programmer can also
access the Data Flash. The Data Flash size is software adjustable in N79E715 (16 KB) by updating
the content of SHBDA. SHBDA[7:0] represents the high byte of 16-bit Data Flash start address and
the low byte is hardware set to 00H. The value of SHBDA is loaded from the content of CONFIG1
(CHBDA) after all resets. The application program can dynamically adjust the Data Flash size by
resetting SHBDA value. Once the Data Flash size is changed the APROM size is changed
accordingly. SHBDA has time access protection while a write to SHBDA is required.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 16 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
The CONFIG bit DFEN (CONFIG0.0) should be programmed as 0 before accessing the Data Flash
block. If DFEN remains its un-programmed value 1, APROM will occupy the whole 16 Kbytes block in
N79E715 DFEN.
N79E715
3FFFH
Data Flash
CHBDA
or
SHBDA
[1]
APROM
0000H
[1] The address is [SHBDA, 00H] while DFEN (CONFIG0.0) is enabled.
Figure 6-2 N79E715 Data Flash
SHBDA – SFR High Byte of Data Flash Starting Address (TA protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SHBDA[7:0] [1]
R/W
Address: 9CH
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 17 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
SHBDA[7:0]
SFR high byte of Data Flash starting address
This byte is valid only when DFEN (CONFIG0.0) being 0 condition. It is used to
dynamic adjust the starting address of the Data Flash when the application
program is executing.
[1] SHBDA is loaded from CONFIG1 after all resets.
6.5
On-chip XRAM
The N79E715 provides additional on-chip 256 bytes auxiliary RAM called XRAM to enlarge the RAM
space. It occupies the address space from 00H through FFH. The 256 bytes of XRAM are indirectly
accessed by move external instruction MOVX @DPTR or MOVX @Ri. (See the demo code below.)
Note that the stack pointer may not be located in any part of XRAM. Figure 6-1 shows the memory
map for this product series.
XRAM demo code:
6.6
MOV
MOV
MOVX
R0,#23H
A,#5AH
@R0,A
;write #5AH to XRAM with address @23H
MOV
MOVX
R1,#23H
A,@R1
;read from XRAM with address @23H
MOV
MOV
MOVX
DPTR,#0023H
A,#5BH
@DPTR,A
;write #5BH to XRAM with address @0023H
MOV
MOVX
DPTR,#0023H
A,@DPTR
;read from XRAM with address @0023H
On-chip scratch-pad RAM and SFR
The N79E715 provides the on-chip 256 bytes scratch pad RAM and Special Function Registers
(SFRs) which are accessed by software. The SFRs are accessed only by direct addressing, while the
on-chip RAM is accessed by either direct or indirect addressing.
FFH
Indirect
RAM
Addressing
80H
7FH
00H
SFR
Direct
Addressing
Only
Direct
&
Indirect
RAM
Addressing
Figure 6-3 256 bytes RAM and SFR
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 18 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Since the scratch-pad RAM is only 256 byte it can be used only when data contents are small. There
are several other special purpose areas within the scratch-pad RAM, which are described as follows.
FFH FFH
Indirect Accessing RAM
80H
7FH
Direct or Indirect Accessing RAM
30H
2FH
2EH
2DH
2CH
2BH
2AH
29H
28H
27H
26H
25H
24H
23H
22H
21H
20H
1FH
7F
77
6F
67
5F
57
4F
47
3F
37
2F
27
1F
17
0F
07
7E
76
6E
66
5E
56
4E
46
3E
36
2E
26
1E
16
0E
06
7D
75
6D
65
5D
55
4D
45
3D
35
2D
25
1D
15
0D
05
7C
74
6C
64
5C
54
4C
44
3C
34
2C
24
1C
14
0C
04
7B
73
6B
63
5B
53
4B
43
3B
33
2B
23
1B
13
0B
03
7A
72
6A
62
5A
52
4A
42
3A
32
2A
22
1A
12
0A
02
79
71
69
61
59
51
49
41
39
31
29
21
19
11
09
01
78
70
68
60
58
50
48
40
38
30
28
20
18
10
08
00
Register Bank 3
18H
17H
Register Bank 2
10H
0FH
Register Bank 1
08H
07H
Register Bank 0
00H
00H
Figure 6-4 Data Memory and Bit-addressable Region
6.7
Working Registers
There are four sets of working registers, each consisting of eight 8-bit registers, which are termed as
Banks 0, 1, 2, and 3. Individual registers within these banks can be directly accessed by separate
instructions. These individual registers are named as R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7. However, at
one time the N79E715 can work with only one particular bank. The bank selection is done by setting
RS1-RS0 bits in the PSW. The R0 and R1 registers are used to store the address for indirect
accessing.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 19 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
6.8
Bit-addressable Locations
The Scratch-pad RAM area from location 20h to 2Fh is byte as well as bit-addressable. This means
that a bit in this area can be individually addressed. In addition, some of the SFRs are also bitaddressable. The instruction decoder is able to distinguish a bit access from a byte access by the type
of the instruction itself. In the SFR area, any existing SFR whose address ends in a 0 or 8 is bitaddressable.
6.9
Stack
The scratch-pad RAM can be used for the stack. This area is selected by the Stack Pointer (SP),
which stores the address of the top of the stack. Whenever a jump, call or interrupt is invoked, the
return address is placed on the stack. There is no restriction as to where the stack can begin in the
RAM. By default, however, the Stack Pointer contains 07h at reset. The user can then change this to
any value desired. The SP will point to the last used value. Therefore, the SP will be incremented and
then address saved onto the stack. Conversely, while popping from the stack the contents will be read
first, and then the SP is decreased.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 20 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
7 Special Function Register (SFR)
The N79E715 uses Special Function Registers (SFRs) to control and monitor peripherals and their
modes. The SFRs reside in the register locations 80~FFH and are accessed by direct addressing only.
Some of the SFRs are bit-addressable. This is very useful in cases where user would like to modify a
particular bit directly without changing other bits. Those that are bit-addressable SFRs end their
addresses as 0H or 8H. The N79E715 contains all the SFRs presenting in the standard 8051.
However, some additional SFRs are built in. Therefore, some of unused bytes in the original 8051
have been given new functions. The SFRs are listed as follows.
Table 7–1 N79E715 Special Function Registers (SFR) Mapping
F8
ADCCON0
-
-
-
-
-
-
EIP
FF
F0
B
-
-
SPCR
SPSR
SPDR
P0DIDS
EIPH
F7
E8
EIE
KBIE
KBIF
KBLS0
KBLS1
C2L
C2H
-
EF
E0
ACC
ADCCON1
ADCH
-
C0L
C0H
C1L
C1H
E7
D8
WDCON0*
PWMPL
PWM0L
PWM1L
PWMCON
0
PWM2L
PWM3L
PWMCON
1
DF
D0
PSW
PWMPH
PWM0H
PWM1H
-
PWM2H
PWM3H
PWMCON
2
D7
C8
T2CON
T2MOD
RCOMP2L
RCOM2H
TL2
TH2
-
-
CF
C0
I2CON
I2ADDR
-
-
-
-
-
TA
C7
B8
IP
SADEN
-
-
I2DAT
I2STA
I2CLK
I2TOC
BF
B0
P3
P0M1
P0M2
P1M1
P1M2
P2M1
P2M2
IPH
B7
A8
IE
SADDR
-
*
WDCON1
*
-
-
ISPFD
ISPCN
AF
*
-
ISPAL
ISPAH
A7
A0
P2
-
AUXR1
PMCR
ISPTRG
98
SCON
SBUF
-
-
SHBDA*
-
-
CHPCON*
9F
90
P1
-
CAPCON0
CAPCON1
CAPCON2
DIVM
P3M1
P3M2
97
88
TCON
TMOD
TL0
TL1
TH0
TH1
CKCON
-
8F
80
P0
SP
DPL
DPH
-
-
-
PCON
87
In Bold bit-addressable
-
reserved
Note:
1.
The reserved SFR addresses should be kept in their own initial states. User should never change their values.
2.
The SFRs in the column with dark borders are bit-addressable
*
With TA-Protection. (Time Access Protection)
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 21 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Symbol
Definition
Address
MSB
EIP
Interrupt Priority 1
FFH
PT2
PSPI
PPWM
PWDI
-
-
(FE)
ADC.0
(FD)
ADCEX
(FC)
ADCI
(FB)
ADCS
(FA)
AADR2
PSPIH
PPWMH
PWDIH
-
-
[1]
LSB
Reset Value
PKB
PI2
0000 0000B
(F9)
AADR1
(F8)
AADR0
0000 0000B
PKBH
PI2H
0000 0000B
ADCCON0
ADC control register 0
F8H
(FF)
ADC.1
EIPH
Interrupt High Priority 1
F7H
PT2H
P0DIDS
Port 0 Digital Input
Disable
F6H
P0DIDS[7:0]
0000 0000B
SPDR
Serial Peripheral Data
Register
F5H
SPDR[7:0]
0000 0000B
SPSR
Serial Peripheral Status
Register
F4H
SPIF
WCOL
SPIOVF
MODF
DISMODF
-
-
-
0000 0000B
SPCR
Serial Peripheral Control
Register
F3H
SSOE
SPIEN
LSBFE
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SPR1
SPR0
0000 0100B
B
B register
F0H
(F7)
B.7
(F6)
B.6
(F5)
B.5
(F4)
B.4
(F3)
B.3
(F2)
B.2
(F1)
B.1
(F0)
B.0
0000 0000B
C2H
Input Capture 2 High
EEH
C2H[7:0]
0000 0000B
C2L
Input Capture 2 Low
EDH
C2L[7:0]
0000 0000B
KBLS1
Keyboard level select 1
ECH
KBLS1[7:0]
0000 0000B
KBLS0
Keyboard level select 0
EBH
KBLS0[7:0]
0000 0000B
KBIF
KBI Interrupt Flag
EAH
KBIF[7:0]
0000 0000B
KBIE
Keyboard Interrupt
Enable
E9H
KBIE[7:0]
0000 0000B
EIE
Interrupt enable 1
E8H
C1H
Input Capture 1 High
E7H
C1H[7:0]
0000 0000B
C1L
Input Capture 1 Low
E6H
C1L[7:0]
0000 0000B
C0H
Input Capture 0 High
E5H
C0H[7:0]
0000 0000B
C0L
Input Capture 0 Low
E4H
C0L[7:0]
0000 0000B
ADCH
ADC converter result
E2H
ADC.9
ADC.8
ADC.7
ADC.6
ADC.5
ADC.4
ADC.3
ADC.2
0000 0000B
ADCCON1
ADC control register1
E1H
ADCEN
-
-
-
-
-
RCCLK
ADC0SEL
0000 0000B
E0H
(E7)
ACC.7
(E6)
ACC.6
(E5)
ACC.5
(E4)
ACC.4
(E3)
ACC.3
(E2)
ACC.2
(E1)
ACC.1
(E0)
ACC.0
0000 0000B
ACC
Accumulator
(EF)
ET2
(EE)
ESPI
(ED)
EPWM
(EC)
EWDI
(E7)
(E8)
ECPTF
(E9)
EKB
(E8)
EI2C
0000 0000B
PWMCON1
PWM control register 1
DFH
BKCH
BKPS
BPEN
BKEN
PWM3B
PWM2B
PWM1B
PWM0B
0000 0000B
PWM3L
PWM 3 low bits register
DEH
PWM3.7
PWM3.6
PWM3.5
PWM3.4
PWM3.3
PWM3.2
PWM3.1
PWM3.0
0000 0000B
PWM2L
PWM 2 low bits register
DDH
PWM2.7
PWM2.6
PWM2.5
PWM2.4
PWM2.3
PWM2.2
PWM2.1
PWM2.0
0000 0000B
PWMCON0
PWM control register 0
DCH
PWMRUN
LOAD
CF
CLRPWM
PWM3I
PWM2I
PWM1I
PWM0I
0000 0000B
PWM1L
PWM 1 low bits register
DBH
PWM1.7
PWM1.6
PWM1.5
PWM1.4
PWM1.3
PWM1.2
PWM1.1
PWM1.0
0000 0000B
PWM0L
PWM 0 low bits register
DAH
PWM0.7
PWM0.6
PWM0.5
PWM0.4
PWM0.3
PWM0.2
PWM0.1
PWM0.0
0000 0000B
PWMPL
PWM counter low
register
D9H
PWMP0.7 PWMP0.6 PWMP0.5 PWMP0.4 PWMP0.3 PWMP0.2 PWMP0.1 PWMP0.0
0000 0000B
(DE)
WDCLR
(DD)
WDTF
(DC)
WIDPD
(DB)
WDTRF
(DA)
WPS2
(D9)
WPS1
(D8)
WPS0
Power-ON
C000 0000B
Watch reset
C0UU 1UUUB
Other reset
C0UU UUUUB
Watch-Dog control 0
D8H
(DF)
WDTEN
PWMCON2
PWM control register 2
D7H
-
-
-
-
FP1
FP0
-
BKF
0000 0000B
PWM3H
PWM 3 high bits register
D6H
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM3.9
PWM3.8
0000 0000B
PWM2H
PWM 2 high bits register
D5H
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM2.9
PWM2.8
0000 0000B
PWM1H
PWM 1 high bits register
D3H
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM1.9
PWM1.8
0000 0000B
PWM0H
PWM 0 high bits register
D2H
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM0.9
PWM0.8
0000 0000B
PWMPH
PWM counter high
register
D1H
-
-
-
-
-
-
WDCON0
[4][3]
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 22 of 189
PWMP0.9 PWMP0.8
0000 0000B
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
[1]
Symbol
Definition
Address
MSB
PSW
Program status word
D0H
(D7)
CY
TH2
Timer 2 MSB
CDH
TH2[7:0]
0000 0000B
TL2
Timer 2 LSB
CCH
TL2[7:0]
0000 0000B
RCOMP2H
Timer 2 Reload MSB
CBH
RCOMP2H[7:0]
0000 0000B
RCOMP2L
Timer 2 Reload LSB
CAH
T2MOD
Timer 2 Mode
C9H
LDEN
(CF)
TF2
T2CON
Timer 2 Control
C8H
TA
Timed Access Protection
C7H
I2ADDR
I2C address
C1H
(D6)
AC
(D5)
F0
(D4)
RS1
(D3)
RS0
(D2)
OV
(D1)
F1
LSB
Reset Value
(D0)
P
0000 0000B
RCOMPL2[7:0]
T2DIV[2:0]
-
-
0000 0000B
CAPCR
COMPCR
-
(CA)
TR2
-
LDTS[1:0]
0000 0000B
(C8)
-
CP/RL2
0000 0000B
1111 1111B
ADDR[7:1]
I2CON
I2C Control register
C0H
(C7)
-
I2TOC
I2C Time-out Counter
register
BFH
-
GC
0000 0000B
(C6)
I2CEN
(C5)
STA
(C4)
STO
(C3)
SI
(C2)
AA
(C1)
-
(C0)
-
0000 0000B
-
-
-
-
I2TOCEN
DIV
I2TOF
0000 0000B
0
0
0
I2CLK
I2C Clock Rate
BEH
I2STA
I2C Status Register
BDH
I2DAT
I2C Data Register
BCH
I2DAT[7:0]
0000 0000B
SADEN
Slave address mask
B9H
SADEN[7:0]
0000 0000B
IP
Interrupt priority
B8H
(BF)
PCAP
(BE)
PADC
(BD)
PBOD
(BC)
PS
(BB)
PT1
(BA)
PX1
(B9)
PT0
(B8)
PX0
0000 0000B
IPH
Interrupt high priority
B7H
PCAPH
PADCH
PBODH
PSH
PT1H
PX1H
PT0H
PX0H
0000 0000B
P2M2
Port 2 output mode 2
B6H
P2M2[7:0]
P2M1
Port 2 output mode 1
B5H
P2M1[7:0]
P1M2
Port 1 output mode 2
B4H
P1M2.7
P1M2.6
-
P1M2.4
P1M2.3
P1M2.2
P1M2.1
P1M2.0
0000 0000B
P1M1
Port 1 output mode 1
B3H
P1M1.7
P1M1.6
-
P1M1.4
P1M1.3
P1M1.2
P1M1.1
P1M1.0
0000 0000B
P0M2
Port 0 output mode 2
B2H
P0M2[7:0]
P0M1
Port 0 output mode 1
B1H
P0M1[7:0]
P3
Port3
0000 0000B
0000 0000b
-
-
-
-
-
ISPA17
ISPA16
FOEN
FCEN
FCTRL3
FCTRL2
FCTRL1
ISP Control Register
AFH
AEH
Watch-Dog control1
ABH
Slave address
A9H
SADDR
0000 0000B
-
ISP Flash Data Register
(B0)
X2
CLKOUT
0000 0011B
FCTRL0
0011 0000B
ISPFD[7:0]
-
-
-
-
-
0000 0000B
-
-
EWRST
(AA)
EX1
(A9)
ET0
(A8)
EX0
SADDR[7:0]
(AF)
EA
(AE)
EADC
(AD)
EBOD
(AC)
ES
1111 1000B
0000 0000B
B0H
ISPFD
WDCON1
0000 0000B
(B1)
X1
ISPCN
[4]
I2CLK[7:0]
I2STA[7:3]
(AB)
ET1
0000 0000B
00000000B
IE
Interrupt enable
A8H
ISPAH
ISP Flash Address Highbyte
A7H
ISPAH[7:0]
0000 0000B
ISPAL
ISP Flash Address Lowbyte
A6H
ISPAL[7:0]
0000 0000B
ISP Trigger Register
A4H
ISPTRG
[4]
-
-
Power Monitor Control
Register
A3H
BODEN
AUXR1
AUX function register
A2H
SPI_Sel UART_Sel
P2
Port 2
A0H
PMCR
[2][4]
Jan. 6, 2016
(97)
BOV
(96)
-
-
-
-
BORST
BOF
-
-
DisP26
(95)
(94)
(93)
Page 23 of 189
-
-
-
ISPGO
0000 0000B
0000 0000B
Power-on
CC0C 100XB
BOR reset
UU0U 100XB
Other reset
UU0U 000XB
-
BOS
-
0
DPS
0000 0000B
(92)
(91)
(90)
1111 1111B
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Symbol
[4]
Definition
Address
MSB
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
SWRST
ISPF
LDUE
-
-
-
P21
[3]
LSB
P20
Power-ON
0000 00C0B
Other reset
0000 00C0B
Power ON
CCCC CCCCB
Other Reset
UUUU UUUUB
Chip Control
9FH
High-byte Data Flash
Start Address
9CH
SBUF
Serial buffer
99H
SBUF.7
SBUF.6
SBUF.5
SBUF.4
SBUF.3
SBUF.2
SBUF.1
SBUF.0
0000 0000B
SCON
Serial control
98H
(9F)
SM0/FE
(9E)
SM1
(9D)
SM2
(9C)
REN
(9B)
TB8
(9A)
RB8
(99)
TI
(98)
RI
0000 0000B
P3M2
Port 3 output mode 2
97H
-
-
-
-
-
ENCLK
P3M2.1
P3M2.0
00000000B
P3M1
Port 3 output mode 1
96H
P3S
P2S
P1S
P0S
T1OE
T0OE
P3M1.1
P3M1.0
00000000B
DIVM
CPU Clock Divide
Register
95H
CAPCON2
Input capture control 2
94H
-
ENF2
CAPCON1
Input capture control 1
93H
-
-
CAPCON0
Input capture control 0
92H
-
CAPEN2
CAPEN1
CAPEN0
-
CAPF2
CAPF1
CAPF0
0000 0000B
P1
Port 1
90H
(97)
P17
(96)
P16
-
(94)
P14
(93)
P13
(92)
P12
(91)
P11
(90)
P10
1111 1111B
CKCON
Clock control
8EH
-
-
-
T1M
T0M
-
-
-
0000 0000B
TH1
Timer high 1
8DH
TH1[7:0]
0000 0000B
TH0
Timer high 0
8CH
TH0[7:0]
0000 0000B
TL1
Timer low 1
8BH
TL1[7:0]
0000 0000B
TL0
Timer low 0
8AH
TL0[7:0]
TMOD
Timer mode
89H
GATE
C/T
M1
M0
GATE
C/T
M1
M0
0000 0000B
(8E)
TR1
(8D)
TF0
(8C)
TR0
(8B)
IE1
(8A)
IT1
(89)
IE0
(88)
IT0
0000 0000B
SMOD0
-
POF
GF1
GF0
PD
IDL
Power-on
0001 0000B
Other reset
000u 0000B
CHPCON
SHBDA
[4]
BS
ISPEN
[1]
Reset Value
SHBDA[7:0], SHBDA Initial by CHBDA
DIVM[7:0]
ENF1
ENF0
0000 0000B
-
CAP2LS1[2:0]
-
CAP1LS1[2:0]
-
-
CAP1LS1[2:0]
0000 0000B
0000 0000B
0000 0000B
TCON
Timer control
88H
(8F)
TF1
PCON
Power control
87H
SMOD
DPH
Data pointer high
83H
DPH[7:0]
0000 0000B
DPL
Data pointer low
82H
DPL[7:0]
0000 0000B
SP
Stack pointer
81H
SP[7:0]
P0
Port 0
80H
(87)
P07
(86)
P06
(85)
P05
(84)
P04
0000 0111B
(83)
P03
(82)
P02
(81)
P01
(80)
P00
1111 1111B
Note: Bits marked in "-" should be kept in their own initial states. User should never change their values.
Note:
[1.]
[2.]
[3.]
[4.]
[5.]
[6.]
( ) item means the bit address in bit-addressable SFRs.
BODEN, BOV and BORST are initialized by CONFIG2 at power-on reset, and keep unchanged at any other resets. If
BODEN=1, BOF will be automatically set by hardware at power-on reset, and keeps unchanged at any other resets.
Initialized by power-on reset. WDTEN=/CWDTEN; BS=/CBS;
With TA-Protection. (Time Access Protection)
Notation “C” means the bit is defined by CONFIG-bits; “U” means the bit is unchanged after any reset except power-on
reset.
Reset value symbol description. 0: logic 0, 1: logic 1, U: unchanged, X: C: initial by CONFIG..
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 24 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
8 General 80C51 System Control
A or ACC – Accumulator (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
ACC.7
ACC.6
ACC.5
ACC.4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: E0H
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
ACC[7:0]
Accumulator
3
ACC.3
R/W
2
ACC.2
R/W
1
0
ACC.1
ACC.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
The A or ACC register is the standard 8051 accumulator for arithmetic operation.
B – B Register (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
B.7
B.6
B.5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: F0H
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
B[7:0]
B Register
4
B.4
R/W
3
B.3
R/W
2
B.2
R/W
1
0
B.1
B.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
The B register is the other accumulator of the standard 8051. It is used mainly for
MUL and DIV operations.
SP – Stack Pointer
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SP[7:0]
R/W
Address: 81H
Reset value: 0000 0111B
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
SP[7:0]
Stack Pointer
The Stack Pointer stores the scratch-pad RAM address where the stack begins. It
is incremented before data is stored during PUSH or CALL instructions. Note that
the default value of SP is 07H. It causes the stack to begin at location 08H.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 25 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
DPL – Data Pointer Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DPL[7:0]
R/W
Address: 82H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
DPL[7:0]
Description
Data Pointer Low Byte
This is the low byte of the standard 8051 16-bit data pointer. DPL combined with
DPH serve as a 16-bit data pointer DPTR to address non-scratch-pad memory or
Program Memory.
DPH – Data Pointer High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DPH[7:0]
R/W
Address: 83H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
DPH[7:0]
Description
Data Pointer High Byte
This is the high byte of the standard 8051 16-bit data pointer. DPH combined with
DPL serve as a 16-bit data pointer DPTR to address non-scratch-pad memory or
Program Memory.
PSW – Program Status Word (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
CY
AC
F0
RS1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: D0H
Bit
Name
7
CY
3
RS0
R/W
2
OV
R/W
1
0
F1
P
R/W
R
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Carry Flag
For a adding or subtracting operation, CY will be set when the previous operation
resulted in a carryout from or a borrow-in to the Most Significant bit, otherwise
cleared. If the previous operation is MUL or DIV, CY is always 0.
CY is affected by DA AN instruction that indicates that if the original BCD sum is
greater than 100. For a CJNE branch, CY will be set if the first unsigned integer
value is less than the second one. Otherwise, CY will be cleared.
6
AC
Auxiliary Carry
Set when the previous operation resulted in a carryout from or a borrow-in to the
4th bit of the low order nibble, otherwise cleared.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 26 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
5
F0
User Flag 0
The general-purpose flag that can be set or cleared by the user.
4
RS1
Register Bank Selecting Bits
3
RS0
The two bits select one of four banks in which R0~R7 locate.
OV
RS1 RS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Overflow Flag
2
Register Bank
0
1
2
3
RAM Address
00~07H
08~0FH
10~17H
18~1FH
OV is used for a signed character operands. For an ADD or ADDC instruction, OV
will be set if there is a carry out of bit 6 but not out of bit 7, or a carry out of bit 7
but not bit 6. Otherwise, OV is cleared. OV indicates a negative number produced
as the sum of two positive operands or a positive sum from two negative
operands. For a SUBB, OV is set if a borrow is needed into bit6 but not into bit 7,
or into bit7 but not bit 6. Otherwise, OV is cleared. OV indicates a negative
number produced when a negative value is subtracted from a positive value or a
positive result when a positive number is subtracted from a negative number.
For a MUL, if the product is greater than 255 (00FFH), OV will be set. Otherwise,
it is cleared.
For a DIV, it is normally 0. However, if B had originally contained 00H, the values
returned in A and B will be undefined. Meanwhile, the OV will be set.
1
F1
User Flag 1
The general purpose flag that can be set or cleared by the user via software.
0
P
Parity Flag
Set to 1 to indicate an odd number of ones in the accumulator. Cleared for an
even number of ones. It performs even parity check.
Table 8–1 Instructions that Affect Flag Settings
Instruction
ADD
CY
[1]
X
OV
AC
Instruction
CY
X
X
CLR C
0
ADDC
X
X
X
CPL C
X
SUBB
X
X
X
ANL C, bit
X
MUL
0
X
ANL C, /bit
X
DIV
0
X
ORL C, bit
X
DA A
X
ORL C, /bit
X
RRC A
X
MOV C, bit
X
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 27 of 189
OV
AC
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Instruction
CY
RLC A
X
SETB C
1
OV
AC
Instruction
CY
CJNE
X
OV
AC
[1] X indicates the modification is dependent on the result of the instruction
PCON – Power Control
7
6
SMOD
SMOD0
R/W
R/W
Address: 87H
Bit
Name
3
GF1
5
-
4
3
2
1
0
POF
GF1
GF0
PD
IDL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Description
General Purpose Flag 1
The general purpose flag that can be set or cleared by the user.
2
GF0
General Purpose Flag 0
The general purpose flag that can be set or cleared by the user.
General 80C51 support one DPTR but the N79E715 support two DPTRs by switching AUXR1.DPS.
The setting is as follows.
AUXR1 – AUX Function Resgister-1
7
6
5
SPI_Sel
UART_Sel
R/W
R/W
Address: A2H
Bit
Name
0
DPS
Jan. 6, 2016
4
-
3
DisP26
R/W
2
-
1
0
0
DPS
R
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Dual Data Pointer Selection
0 = Select DPTR of standard 8051.
1 = Select DPTR1
Page 28 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
9 I/O Port Structure and Operation
For N79E715, there are four I/O ports － port 0, port 1, port2 and port 3. If using HIRC and reset pin
configurations, the N79E715 can support up to 25 pins. All I/O pins besides P1.2 and P1.3 can be
configured to one of four types by software as shown in the following table.
Table 9–1 Setting Table for I/O Ports Structure
PxM1.y
PxM2.y
Port I/O Mode
0
0
Quasi-bidirectional
0
1
Push-Pull
1
0
Input Only (High Impedance)
1
1
Open Drain
Note: P1.2 and P1.3 are not effective in this table.
After reset, these pins are in quasi-bidirectional mode except P1.2 and P1.3 pins.
The P1.2 and P1.3 are dedicating open-drain pin for I2C interface after reset.
Each I/O port of N79E715 may be selected to use TTL level inputs or Schmitt inputs by P(n)S bit on
P3M1 register; where n is 0, 1, 2 or 3. When P(n)S is set to 1, Ports are selected Schmitt trigger inputs
on Port(n).
The P3.0 (XTAL2) can be configured as clock output when used HIRC or external crystal is clock
source, and the frequency of clock output is divided by 4 HIRC clock or external crystal.
9.1 Quasi-Bidirectional Output Configuration
The default port configuration for standard N79E715 I/O ports is “Quasi-bidirectional” mode that is
common on the 80C51 and most of its derivatives. This type rules as both input and output. When the
port outputs a logic high, it is weakly driven, allowing an external device to pull the pin low. When the
pin is pulled low, it is driven strongly and able to sink a large current. In the quasi bidirectional I/O
structure, there are three pull-up transistors. Each of them serves different purposes. One of these
pull-ups, called the “very weak” pull-up, is turned on whenever the port latch contains logic 1. The
“very weak” pull-up sources a very small current that will pull the pin high if it is left floating.
A second pull-up, called the “weak” pull-up, is turned on when the outside port pin itself is at logic 1
level. This pull-up provides the primary source current for a quasi-bidirectional pin that is outputting 1.
If a pin that has logic 1 on it is pulled low by an external device, the “weak” pull-up turns off, and only
the “very weak” pull-up remains on. To pull the pin low under these conditions, the external device has
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 29 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
to sink enough current (larger than ITL) to overcome the “weak” pull-up and make the voltage on the
port pin below its input threshold (lower than VIL).
The third pull-up is the “strong” pull-up. This pull-up is used to speed up low-to-high transitions on a
quasi-bidirectional port pin when the port latch changes from logic 0 to logic 1. When this occurs, the
strong pull-up turns on for two-peripheral-clock time to pull the port pin high quickly. Then it turns off
and “weak: pull-up continues remaining the port pin high. The quasi bidirectional port structure is
shown below.
VDD
2-peripheralclock delay
P
Strong
P
Very
Weak
P
Weak
Port Pin
N
Port Latch
Input
Figure 9-1 Quasi Bi-direction I/O Structure
9.1.1
Read-Modify-Write
In the standard 8051 instruction set, user should watch out for one kind of instructions, read-modifywrite instructions. Instead of the normal instructions, the read-modify-write instructions read the
internal port latch (Px in SFRs) rather than the external port pin state. This kind of instructions read the
port SFR value, modify it and write back to the port SFR. Read-modify-write instructions are listed as
follows.
Instruction
Description
ANL
Logical AND. (ANL Px,A and ANL Px,direct)
ORL
Logical OR. (ORL Px,A and ORL Px,direct)
XRL
Logical exclusive OR. (XRL Px,A and XRL Px,direct)
JBC
Jump if bit = 1 and clear it. (JBC Px.y,LABEL)
CPL
Complement bit. (CPL Px.y)
INC
Increment. (INC Px)
DEC
Decrement. (DEC Px)
DJNZ
Decrement and jump if not zero. (DJNZ Px,LABEL)
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 30 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
MOV
Px.y,C Move carry bit to Px.y.
CLR
Px.y
Clear bit Px.y.
SETB
Px.y
Set bit Px.y.
The last three seems not obviously read-modify-write instructions but actually they are. They read the
entire port latch value, modify the changed bit, and then write the new value back to the port latch.
9.2 Open Drain Output Configuration
The open drain output configuration turns off all pull-ups and only drives the pull-down transistor of the
port driver when the port latch contains logic 0. To be used as a logic output, a port configured in this
manner should have an external pull-up, typically a resistor tied to VDD. The pull-down for this mode is
the same as for the quasi-bidirectional mode. The open drain port configuration is shown below.
Port Pin
Port Latch
Data
N
Input Data
Figure 9-2 Open Drain Output
9.3 Push-Pull Output Configuration
The push-pull output configuration has the same pull-down structure as both the open drain and the
quasi-bidirectional output modes, but provides a continuous strong pull-up when the port latch
contains logic 1. The push-pull mode may be used when more source current is needed from a port
output. The push-pull port configuration is shown in Figure 9-2. The two port pins that cannot be
configured are P1.2 (SCL) and P1.3 (SDA). The port pins P1.2 and P1.3 are permanently configured
as open drain outputs. They may be used as inputs by writing ones to their respective port latches.
Additionally, port pins P3.0 and P3.1 are disabled for both input and output if one of the crystal
oscillator options is chosen. Those options are described in the Oscillator section.
When port pins are driven high at reset, they are in quasi-bidirectional mode and therefore do not
source large amounts of current. Every output on the N79E715 may potentially be used as a 38 mA
sink LED drive output. However, there is a maximum total output current for all ports which should not
be exceeded.
All port pins of the N79E715 have slew rate controlled outputs. This is to limit noise generated by
quickly switching output signals. The slew rate is factory set to approximately 10 ns rise and fall times.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 31 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
The bits in the P3M1 register that are not used to control configuration of P3.1 and P3.0 are used for
other purposes. These bits can enable Schmitt trigger inputs on each I/O port, enable toggle outputs
from Timer 0 and Timer 1, and enable a clock output if either the HIRC or external clock input is being
used. The last two functions are described in the Timers/Counters and Oscillator sections respectively.
Each I/O port of the N79E715 may be selected to use TTL level inputs or Schmitt inputs with
hysteresis. A single configuration bit determines this selection for the entire port.
VDD
P
Port Pin
Port Latch
Data
N
Input Data
Figure 9-3 Push-Pull Output
9.4 Input Only Configuration
By setting this mode, the ports are only input mode. After setting this mode, the pin will be HiImpendence.
P0 – Port 0 (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
P07
P06
P05
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 80H
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
P0[7:0]
Port 0
4
P04
R/W
3
P03
R/W
2
P02
R/W
1
0
P01
P00
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 1111 1111B
Port 0 is an 8-bit quasi bidirectional I/O port.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 32 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
P1 – Port 1 (Bit-addressable)
7
6
P17
P16
R/W
R/W
Address: 90H
Bit
7:0
Name
P1[7:0]
5
-
4
P14
R/W
3
P13
R/W
2
P12
R/W
1
0
P11
P10
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 1111 1111B
Description
Port 1
These pins are in quasi-bidirectional mode except P1.2 and P1.3 pins.
2
The P1.2 and P1.3 are dedicating open-drain pins for I C interface after reset.
P2 – Port 2 (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
P27
P26
P25
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: A0H
Bit
7:0
Name
P2[7:0]
4
P24
R/W
3
P23
R/W
2
P22
R/W
1
0
P21
P20
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 1111 1111B
2
-
1
0
P31
P30
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0011B
Description
Port 2
Port 2 is an 8-bit quasi bidirectional I/O port.
P3 – Port 3 (Bit-addressable)
7
6
Address: B0H
5
-
4
-
-
3
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1
P3.1
X1 or I/O pin by alternative.
0
P3.0
X2 or CLKOUT or I/O pin by alternative.
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Reserved
Page 33 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
P0M1 – Port 0 Output Mode 1
7
6
5
P0M1.7
P0M1.6
P0M1.5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: B1H
4
P0M1.4
R/W
3
P0M1.3
R/W
2
P0M1.2
R/W
1
0
P0M1.1
P0M1.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P0M2 – Port 0 Output Mode2
7
6
5
P0M2.7
P0M2.6
P0M2.5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: B2H
4
P0M2.4
R/W
3
P0M2.3
R/W
2
P0M2.2
R/W
1
0
P0M2.1
P0M2.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P1M1 – Port 1 Output Mode 1
7
6
P1M1.7
P1M1.6
R/W
R/W
Address: B3H
5
-
4
P1M1.4
R/W
3
P1M1.3
R/W
2
P1M1.2
R/W
1
0
P1M1.1
P1M1.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P1M2 – Port 1 Output Mode2
7
6
P1M2.7
P1M2.6
R/W
R/W
Address: B4H
5
-
4
P1M2.4
R/W
3
P1M2.3
R/W
2
P1M2.2
R/W
1
0
P1M2.1
P1M2.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P2M1 – Port 2 Output Mode 1
7
6
5
P2M1.7
P2M1.6
P2M1.5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: B5H
4
P2M1.4
R/W
3
P2M1.3
R/W
2
P2M1.2
R/W
1
0
P2M1.1
P2M1.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P2M2 – Port 2 Output Mode 2
7
6
5
P2M2.7
P2M2.6
P2M2.5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: B6H
4
P2M2.4
R/W
3
P2M2.3
R/W
2
P2M2.2
R/W
1
0
P2M2.1
P2M2.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
4
P0S
R/W
3
T1OE
R/W
2
T0OE
R/W
1
0
P3M1.1
P3M1.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
P3M1 – Port3 Output Mode 1
7
6
5
P3S
P2S
P1S
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 96H
Bit
Name
7
P3S
Enable Schmitt trigger inputs on Port 3.
6
P2S
Enable Schmitt trigger inputs on Port 2.
5
P1S
Enable Schmitt trigger inputs on Port 1.
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Page 34 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
4
P0S
Description
Enable Schmitt trigger inputs on Port 0.
1
P3M1.1
Control the output configuration of P3.1.
0
P3M1.0
Control the output configuration of P3.0.
P3M2 – Port3 Output Mode2
7
6
Address: 97H
Bit
Name
7:3
-
0
ENCLK
5
-
4
-
-
3
-
2
ENCLK
R/W
1
0
P3M2.1
P3M2.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
Clock Output to XTAL2 Pin (P3.0) Enable
If the clock is from HIRC, the frequency of P3.0 is FHIRC/4.
1
P3M2.1
0
P3M2.0
Jan. 6, 2016
Refer to Table 9-1 Setting Table for I/O Port Structure
Page 35 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
10 Timers/Counters
The N79E715 has three 16-bit programmable timers/counters.
10.1 Timers/Counters 0 and 1
Timer/Counter 0 and 1 in N79E715 are two 16-bit Timers/Counters. Each of them has two 8-bit
registers that form the 16-bit counting register. For Timer/Counter 0 they are TH0, the upper 8-bit
register, and TL0, the lower 8-bit register. Similar Timer/Counter 1 has two 8-bit registers, TH1 and
TL1. TCON and TMOD can configure modes of Timer/Counter 0 and 1.
They have additional timer 0 or timer 1 overflow toggle output enable feature as compare to
conventional timers/counters. This timer overflow toggle output can be configured to automatically
toggle T0 or T1 pin output whenever a timer overflow occurs.
When configured as a “Timer”, the timer counts clock cycles. The timer clock can be programmed to
be thought of as 1/12 of the clock system or 1/4 of the clock system. In the “Counter” mode, the
register is incremented on the falling edge of the external input pin, T0 in case of Timer 0, and T1 for
Timer 1. The T0 and T1 inputs are sampled in every machine-cycle at C4. If the sampled value is high
in one machine-cycle and low in the next, then a valid high to low transition on the pin is recognized
and the count register is incremented. Since it takes two machine-cycles to recognize a negative
transition on the pin, the maximum rate at which counting will take place is 1/24 of the master clock
frequency. In either the “Timer” or “Counter” mode, the count register will be updated at C3. Therefore,
in the “Timer” mode, the recognized negative transition on pin T0 and T1 can cause the count register
value to be updated only in the machine-cycle following the one in which the negative edge was
detected.
The “Timer” or “Counter” function is selected by the “ C/T ” bit in the TMOD Special Function Register.
Each Timer/Counter has one selection bit for its own; bit 2 of TMOD selects the function for
Timer/Counter 0 and bit 6 of TMOD selects the function for Timer/Counter 1. In addition each
Timer/Counter can be set to operate in any one of four possible modes. The mode selection is done
by bits M0 and M1 in the TMOD SFR.
The N79E715 can operate like the standard 8051/52 family, counting at the rate of 1/12 of the clock
speed, or in turbo mode, counting at the rate of 1/4 clock speed. The speed is controlled by the T0M
and T1M bits in CKCON, and the default value is zero, which uses the standard 8051/52 speed.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 36 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CKCON – Clock Control
7
6
Address: 8EH
-
Bit
7:5
4
Name
T1M
3
T0M
2:0
-
R/W
4
3
T1M
T0M
-
R/W
R/W
2
-
1
-
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
Timer 1 Clock Selection
0 = Timer 1 uses a divide by 12 clocks.
1 = Timer 1 uses a divide by 4 clocks.
Timer 0 Clock Selection
0 =Timer 0 uses a divide by 12 clocks.
1 = Timer 0 uses a divide by 4 clocks.
Reserved
TMOD – Timer 0 and 1 Mode
7
6
GATE
C/ T
R/W
Address: 89H
5
-
5
M1
4
M0
3
GATE
C/ T
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7
GATE
Timer 1 Gate Control
2
1
M1
0
M0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
0 = Timer 1 will clock when TR1 = 1 regardless of INT1 logic level.
1 = Timer 1 will clock only when TR1 = 1 and INT1 is logic 1.
6
C/T
Timer 1 Counter/Timer Selection
0 = Timer 1 is incremented by internal peripheral clocks.
1 = Timer 1 is incremented by the falling edge of the external pin T1.
5
M1
Timer 1 Mode Selection
4
M0
3
GATE
M1
M0
Timer 1 Mode
0
0
Mode 0: 8-bit Timer/Counter with 5-bit pre-scalar (TL1[4:0])
0
1
Mode 1: 16-bit Timer/Counter
1
0
Mode 2: 8-bit Timer/Counter with auto-reload from TH1
1
1
Mode 3: Timer 1 halted
Timer 0 Gate Control
0 = Timer 0 will clock when TR0 = 1 regardless of INT0 logic level.
1 = Timer 0 will clock only when TR0 = 0 and INT0 is logic 1.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 37 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
2
C/T
Description
Timer 0 Counter/Timer Selection
0 = Timer 0 is incremented by internal peripheral clocks.
1 = Timer 0 is incremented by the falling edge of the external pin T0.
1
M1
0
M0
Timer 0 Mode Selection
M1
0
0
1
1
M0
0
1
0
1
Timer 0 Mode
Mode 0: 8-bit Timer/Counter with 5-bit pre-scalar (TL0[4:0])
Mode 1: 16-bit Timer/Counter
Mode 2: 8-bit Timer/Counter with auto-reload from TH0
Mode 3: TL0 as a 8-bit Timer/Counter and TH0 as a 8-bit
Timer
TCON – Timer 0 and 1 Control (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 88H
Bit
Name
7
TF1
3
IE1
R/W
2
IT1
R/W
1
0
IE0
IT0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Timer 1 Overflow Flag
This bit is set when Timer 1 overflows. It is automatically cleared by hardware
when the program executes the Timer 1 interrupt service routine. Software can
also set or clear this bit.
6
TR1
Timer 1 Run Control
0 = Timer 1 is halted. Clearing this bit will halt Timer 1 and the current count will
be preserved in TH1 and TL1.
1 = Timer 1 is enabled.
5
TF0
Timer 0 Overflow Flag
This bit is set when Timer 0 overflows. It is automatically cleared via hardware
when the program executes the Timer 0 interrupt service routine. Software can
also set or clear this bit.
4
TR0
Timer 0 Run Control
0 = Timer 0 is halted. Clearing this bit will halt Timer 0 and the current count will
be preserved in TH0 and TL0.
1 = Timer 0 is enabled.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 38 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
TL0 – Timer 0 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TL0[7:0]
R/W
Address: 8AH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
TL0[7:0]
Timer 0 Low Byte
The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
TH0 – Timer 0 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TH0[7:0]
R/W
Address: 8CH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
TH0[7:0]
Description
Timer 0 High Byte
The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
TL1 – Timer 1 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TL1[7:0]
R/W
Address: 8BH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
TL1[7:0]
Timer 1 Low Byte
The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
TH1 – Timer 1 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TH1[7:0]
R/W
Address: 8DH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
TH1[7:0]
Description
Timer 1 High Byte
The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 39 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
P3M1 – Port3 Output Mode1
7
6
P3S
P2S
R/W
R/W
Address: 96H
5
P1S
R/W
4
P0S
R/W
3
T1OE
R/W
2
T0OE
R/W
1
0
P3M1.1
P3M1.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
3
T1OE
P0.7 pin is toggled whenever Timer 1 overflows. The output frequency is therefore
one half of the Timer 1 overflow rate.
2
T0OE
P1.2 pin is toggled whenever Timer 0 overflows. The output frequency is therefore
one-half of the Timer 0 overflow rate.
10.1.1
Mode 0 (13-bit Timer)
In Mode 0, the timers/counters act as a 8-bit counter with a 5-bit, divide by 32 pre-scale. In this mode
we have a 13-bit timer/counter. The 13-bit counter consists of 8 bits of THx and 5 lower bits of TLx.
The upper 3 bits of TLx are ignored.
The negative edge of the clock is increments count in the TLx register. When the fifth bit in TLx moves
from 1 to 0, then the count in the THx register is incremented. When the count in THx moves from FFh
to 00h, then the overflow flag TFx in TCON SFR is set. The counted input is enabled only if TRx is set
and either GATE = 0 or INTx = 1. When C/T is set to 0, then it will count clock cycles, and if C/T is
set to 1, then it will count 1 to 0 transitions on T0 (P1.2) for timer 0 and T1 (P0.7) for timer 1. When the
13-bit count reaches 1FFFh, the next count will cause it to rollover to 0000h. The timer overflow flag
TFx of the relevant timer is set and if enabled an interrupts will occur.
1/4
FSYS
1/12
T0M=CKCON.3
(T1M=CKCON.4)
1
0
C/T=TMOD.2
(C/T=TMOD.6)
0
1
TL0
(TL1)
0
4
TF0
(TF1)
TFx
7
Interrupt
T0/T1
TR0/TR1
GATE
INT0/INT1
0
7
TH0
(TH1)
T0OE
(T1OE)
1
En
SFR
P1.2
(P0.7)
0
1
PIN
P1.2
(P0.7)
T0OE
(T1OE)
Figure 10-1 Timers/Counters 0 and 1 in Mode 0
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 40 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
10.1.2
Mode 1 (16-bit Timer)
Mode 1 is similar to Mode 0 except that the counting registers are fully used as a 16-bit counter.
Rollover occurs when a count moves FFFFH to 0000H. The Timer overflow flag TFx of the relevant
Timer/Counter is set and an interrupt will occurs if enabled.
1/4
FSYS
1/12
T0M=CKCON.3
(T1M=CKCON.4)
1
C/T=TMOD.2
(C/T=TMOD.6)
0
0
TL0
(TL1)
0
1
4
TF0
(TF1)
TFx
7
Interrupt
T0/T1
0
TR0/TR1
7
TH0
(TH1)
T0OE
(T1OE)
GATE
INT0/INT1
1
En
SFR
P1.2
(P0.7)
PIN
P1.2
(P0.7)
0
1
T0OE
(T1OE)
Figure 10-2 Timers/Counters 0 and 1 in Mode 1
10.1.3
Mode 2 (8-bit Auto-Reload Timer)
In Mode 2, the Timer/Counter is in auto-reload mode. In this mode, TLx acts as an 8-bit count register
whereas THx holds the reload value. When the TLx register overflows from FFH to 00H, the TFx bit in
TCON is set and TLx is reloaded with the contents of THx and the counting process continues from
here. The reload operation leaves the contents of the THx register unchanged. This feature is best
suitable for UART baud rate generator for it runs without continuous software intervention. Note that
only Timer1 can be the baud rate source for UART. Counting is enabled by the TRx bit and proper
setting of GATE and INTx pins. The functions of GATE and INTx pins are just the same as Mode 0
and 1.
1/4
FSYS
1/12
T0M=CKCON.3
(T1M=CKCON.4)
1
0
C/T=TMOD.2
(C/T=TMOD.6)
0
1
TL0
(TL1)
TF0
(TF1)
0
7
0
7
TFx
Interrupt
T0/T1
TR0/TR1
GATE
INT0/INT1
Jan. 6, 2016
TH0
(TH1)
Page 41 of 189
T0OE
(T1OE)
P1.2
(P0.7)
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 10-3 Timer/Counter 0 and 1 in Mode 2
10.1.4
Mode 3 (Two Separate 8-bit Timers)
Mode 3 has different operating methods for the two timers/counters. For timer/counter 1, mode 3
simply freezes the counter. Timer/Counter 0, however, configures TL0 and TH0 as two separate 8 bit
count registers in this mode. The logic for this mode is shown in the following figure. TL0 uses the
Timer/Counter 0 control bits C/ T , GATE, TR0, INT0 and TF0. The TL0 can be used to count clock
cycles (clock/12 or clock/4) or 1-to-0 transitions on pin T0 as determined by C/T (TMOD.2). TH0 is
forced as a clock cycle counter (clock/12 or clock/4) and takes over the use of TR1 and TF1 from
Timer/Counter 1. Mode 3 is used in cases where an extra 8 bit timer is needed. With Timer 0 in Mode
3, Timer 1 can still be used in Modes 0, 1 and 2, but its flexibility is somewhat limited. While its basic
functionality is maintained, it no longer has control over its overflow flag TF1 and the enable bit TR1.
Timer 1 can still be used as a timer/counter and retains the use of GATE and INT1 pin. In this
condition it can be turned on and off by switching it out of and into its own Mode 3. It can also be used
as a baud rate generator for the serial port.
1/4
FSYS
1/12
T0M=CKCON.3
(T1M=CKCON.4)
1
0
C/T=TMOD.2
0
1
TL0
0
7
TF0
Interrupt
SFR
P1.2
T0=P1.2
PIN
P1.2
Toggle
TR0=TCON.4
(refer to mode 0)
GATE=TMOD.3
T0OE
INT0=P1.3
TH0
TR1=TCON.6
0
7
TF1
Interrupt
SFR
P0.7
PIN
P0.7
Toggle
(refer to mode 0)
T1OE
Figure 10-4 Timer/Counter 0 in Mode 3
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 42 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
10.2 Timer/Counter 2
Timer 2 is a 16-bit up counter cascaded with TH2, the upper 8 bits register, and TL2, the lower 8-bit
register. Equipped with RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L, Timer 2 can operate under compare mode and
auto-reload mode. The additional 3-channel input capture module makes Timer 2 detect and measure
the width or period of input pulses. The results of 3 input captures are stores in C0H and C0L, C1H
and C1L, C2H and C2L individually. The clock source of Timer 2 is from the clock system pre-scaled
by a clock divider with 8 different scales for wide field application. The clock is enabled when TR2
(T2CON.2) is 1, and disabled when TR2 is 0. The following registers are related to Timer 2 function.
T2CON – Timer 2 Control (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
TF2
R/W
Address: C8H
Bit
Name
7
TF2
6:3
-
2
TR2
1
-
0
CP/RL2
T2MOD – Timer 2 Mode
7
6
LDEN
R/W
R/W
Address: C9H
3
-
2
TR2
R/W
1
0
CP/RL2
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Timer 2 Overflow Flag
This bit is set when Timer 2 overflows or a compare match occurs. If the Timer 2
interrupt and the global interrupt are enable, setting this bit will make CPU execute
Timer 2 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared via hardware
and should be cleared via software.
Reserved
Timer 2 Run Control
0 = Timer 2 is halted. Clearing this bit will halt Timer 2 and the current count will be
preserved in TH2 and TL2.
1 = Timer 2 is enabled.
Reserved
Timer 2 Capture or Reload Selection
This bit selects whether Timer 2 functions in compare or auto-reload mode.
0 = Auto-reload on Timer 2 overflow or any input capture event.
1 = Compare mode of Timer 2.
5
T2DIV[2:0]
R/W
4
R/W
3
CAPCR
R/W
2
COMPCR
R/W
1
0
LDTS[1:0]
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7
LDEN
Auto-reload Enable
0 = Disable reloading RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L to TH2 and TL2 on Timer 2
overflow or any input capture event.
1 = Enable reloading RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L to TH2 and TL2 on Timer 2
overflow or any input capture event.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 43 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
6:4
T2DIV[2:0]
3
CAPCR
2
COMPCR
Compare Match Auto-clear
This bit enables auto-clear Timer 2 value in TH2 and TL2 when a compare match
occurs.
0 = Timer 2 continues counting when a compare match occurs.
1 = Timer 2 value is auto-cleared as 0000H when a compare match occurs.
1:0
LDTS[1:0]
Auto-reload Trigger Selection
These bits select the reload trigger event.
00 = Reload when Timer 2 overflows.
01 = Reload when input capture 0 event occurs.
10 = Reload when input capture 1 event occurs.
11 = Reload when input capture 2 event occurs.
Timer 2 Clock Divider
000 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/4.
001 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/8.
010 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/16.
011 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/32.
100 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/64.
101 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/128.
110 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/256.
111 = Timer 2 clock divider is 1/512.
Capture Auto-clear
This bit enables auto-clear Timer 2 value in TH2 and TL2 when a determined
input capture event occurs.
0 = Timer 2 continues counting when a capture event occurs.
1 = Timer 2 value is auto-cleared as 0000H when a capture event occurs.
RCOMP2L – Timer 2 Reload/Compare Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
RCOMP2L[7:0]
R/W
Address: CAH
Bit
Name
7:0
RCOMP2L[7:0]
7:0
Jan. 6, 2016
Name
1
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Timer 2 Reload/Compare Low Byte
This register stores the low byte of compare value when Timer 2 is configured
in compare mode, It holds the low byte of the reload value when auto-reload
mode.
RCOMP2H – Timer 2 Reload/Compare High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
RCOMP2H[7:0]
R/W
Address: CBH
Bit
2
2
1
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
RCOMP2H[7:0] Timer 2 Reload/Compare High Byte
This register stores the high byte of compare value when Timer 2 is
configured in compare mode. Also, it holds the high byte of the reload value
when auto-reload mode.
Page 44 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
TL2 – Timer 2 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TL2[7:0]
R/W
Address: CCH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
TL2[7:0]
Description
Timer 2 Low Byte
The TL2 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2.
TH2 – Timer 2 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TH2[7:0]
R/W
Address: CDH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
TH2[7:0]
Description
Timer 2 High Byte
The TH2 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2.
Timer/Counter 2 provides three operating mode which can be selected by control bits in T2CON and
T2MOD as shown in the table below. Note that the TH2 and TL2 are accessed separately. It is
strongly recommended that user stop Timer 2 temporally for a reading from or writing to TH2 and TL2.
The free-running reading or writing may cause unpredictable situation.
Table 10–1 Timer 2 Operating Modes
10.2.1
Timer 2 Mode
CP/RL2 (T2CON.0)
LDEN (T2MOD.7)
Input capture
0
0
Auto-reload
0
1
Compare
1
X
Input Capture Mode
The input capture module with Timer 2 implements the input capture mode. Timer 2 should be
configured by clearing CP/RL2 and LDEN bit to enter input capture mode. The input capture module
is configured through CAPCON0~2 registers. The input capture module supports 3-channel inputs
(IC0, IC1, and IC2 pins) that share I/O pin P1.2, P0.7 and P2.0. Each input channel contains its own
Schmitt trigger input. The noise filter for each channel is enabled via setting ENF0~2 (CAPCON2[6:4]).
It filters input glitches smaller than 4 CPU clocks. Input capture 0~2 have independent edge detector
but share with unique Timer 2. The trigger edge is also configured individually by setting CAPCON1. It
supports positive edge capture, negative edge capture, or both edge captures. Each input capture
channel has its own enabling bit CAPEN0~2 (CAPCON0[6:4]).
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 45 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
While any input capture channel is enabled and the selected edge trigger occurs, the content of the
free running Timer 2 counter, TH2 and TL2, will be captured, transferred, and stores into the capture
registers CnH and CnL. The edge triggering also causes CAPFn (CAPCON0.n) is set by hardware.
The interrupt will also be generated if ECPTF (EIE.2) and EA bit are both set. For three input capture
flags shares the same interrupt vector, the user should check CAPFn to confirm which channel comes
the input capture edge. These flags should be cleared by software.
The bit CAPCR (T2MOD.3) benefits the implement of period calculation. Setting CAPCR makes the
hardware clear Timer 2 as 0000H automatically after the value of TH2 and TL2 have been captured
after an input capture edge event occurs. It eliminates the routine software overhead of writing 16-bit
counter or an arithmetic subtraction.
C0L
CAPF0
[00]
Noise
Filter
IC0 (P1.2)
IC1 (P0.7)
IC2 (P2.0)
C0H
[01]
ENF0
(CAPCON2.4)
[10]
or
CAPEN0
(CAPCON0.4)
CAP0LS[1:0]
(CAPCON1[1:0])
Input Capture 0 Module
Input Capture 1 Module
Input Capture Flags CAPF[2:0]
Input Capture 2 Module
CAPF0 event
CAPF1 event
CAPF2 event
FSYS
Clear Timer 2
Pre-scalar
1/4~1/512
T2DIV[2:0]
(T2MOD[6:4])
TL2
TH2
RCOMP2L
RCOMP2H
CAPCR
(T2MOD.3)
TF2
Timer 2 Interrupt
TR2
(T2CON.2)
CAPF0 event
CAPF1 event
CAPF2 event
LDTS[1:0]
(T2MOD[1:0])
00
01
10
11
LDEN
(T2MOD.7)
Timer 2 Module
Figure 10-5 Timer 2 Input Capture and Auto-reload Mode Function Block
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 46 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CAPCON0 – Input Capture Control 0
7
6
5
CAPEN2
CAPEN1
R/W
R/W
Address: 92H
4
CAPEN0
R/W
3
-
2
CAPF2
R/W
1
0
CAPF1
CAPF0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7
-
6
CAPEN2
Input Capture 2 Enable
0 = Disable input capture channel 2.
1 = Enable input capture channel 2.
5
CAPEN1
Input Capture 1 Enable
0 = Disable input capture channel 1.
1 = Enable input capture channel 1.
4
CAPEN0
Input Capture 0 Enable.
0 = Disable input capture channel 0.
1 = Enable input capture channel 0.
3
-
2
CAPF2
Input Capture 2 Flag
This bit is set by hardware if the determined edge of input capture 2 occurs. This bit
should cleared by software.
1
CAPF1
Input Capture 1 Flag
This bit is set by hardware if the determined edge of input capture 1 occurs. This bit
should cleared by software.
0
CAPF0
Input Capture 0 flag
This bit is set by hardware if the determined edge of input capture 0 occurs. This bit
should cleared by software.
Reserved
Reserved
CAPCON1 – Input Capture Control 1
7
6
5
4
CAP2LS[1:0]
R/W
R/W
Address: 93H
Bit
Name
7:6
-
3
2
CAP1LS[1:0]
R/W
R/W
Description
Reserved
5:4
CAP2LS[1:0] Input Capture 2 Level Selection
00 = Falling edge.
01 = Rising edge.
10 = Either Rising or falling edge.
11 = Reserved
3:2
CAP1LS[1:0] Input Capture 1 Level Selection
00 = Falling edge.
01 = Rising edge.
10 = Either Rising or falling edge.
11 = Reserved
1:0
CAP0LS[1:0] Input Capture 0 Level Selection
00 = Falling edge.
Jan. 6, 2016
1
0
CAP0LS[1:0]
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Page 47 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
01 = Rising edge.
10 = Either rising or falling edge.
11 = Reserved
CAPCON2 – Input Capture Control 2
7
6
5
ENF2
ENF1
R/W
R/W
Address: 94H
4
ENF0
R/W
3
-
Bit
Name
7
-
6
ENF2
Noise Filer on Input Capture 2 Enable
0 = Disable noise filter on input capture channel 2.
1 = Enable noise filter on input capture channel 2.
5
ENF1
Noise Filer on Input Capture 1 Enable
0 = Disable noise filter on input capture channel 1.
1 = Enable noise filter on input capture channel 1.
4
ENF0
Noise filer on Input Capture 0 Enable
0 = Disable noise filter on input capture channel 0.
1 = Enable noise filter on input capture channel 0.
3:0
-
2
-
1
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
Reserved
C0L – Capture 0 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C0L[7:0]
R/W
Address: E4H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C0L[7:0]
Description
Input Capture 0 Result Low Byte
The C0L register is the low byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 0.
C0H – Capture 0 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C0H[7:0]
R/W
Address: E5H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C0H[7:0]
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Input Capture 0 Result High Byte
The C0H register is the high byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 0.
Page 48 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
C1L – Capture 1 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C1L[7:0]
R/W
Address: E6H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C1L[7:0]
Description
Input Capture 1 Result Low Byte
The C1L register is the low byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 1.
C1H – Capture 1 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C1H[7:0]
R/W
Address: E7H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C1H[7:0]
Description
Input Capture 1 Result High Byte
The C1H register is the high byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 1.
C2L – Capture 2 Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C2L[7:0]
R/W
Address: EDH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C2L[7:0]
Description
Input Capture 2 Result Low Byte
The C2L register is the low byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 2.
C2H – Capture 2 High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C2H[7:0]
R/W
Address: EEH
10.2.2
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
C2H[7:0]
Description
Input Capture 2 Result High Byte
The C2H register is the high byte of the 16-bit result captured by input capture 2.
Auto-reload Mode
Timer 2 can be configured as auto-reload mode by clearing CP/RL2 and setting LDEN bit. In this
mode RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L registers stores the reload value. The contents in RCOMP2H and
RCOM3L transfer into TH2 and TL2 once the auto-reload event occurs. The event can be the Timer 2
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 49 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
overflow or one of the triggering event on any of enabled input capture channel depending on the
LDTS[1:0] (T2MOD[1:0]) selection.
Note that once CAPCR (T2MOD.3) is set, an input capture event only clears TH2 and TL2 without
reloading RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L contents.
10.2.3
Compare Mode
Timer 2 can also be configured simply as the compare mode by setting CP/RL2 . In this mode
RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L registers serve as the compare value registers. As Timer 2 up counting,
TH2 and TL2 match RCOMP2H and RCOMP2L, TF3 (T2CON.7) will be set by hardware to indicate a
compare match event.
Setting COMPCR (T2MOD.2) makes the hardware to clear Timer 2 counter as 0000H automatically
after a compare match has occurred.
COMPCR
(T2MOD.2)
FSYS
Pre-scalar
1/4~1/512
T2DIV[2:0]
(T2MOD[6:4])
Clear Timer 2
TL2
TR2
(T2CON.2)
TH2
=
RCOMP2L
TF2
Timer 2 Interrupt
RCOMP2H
Timer 2 Module
Figure 10-6 Timer 2 Compare Mode Function Block
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 50 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
11 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The N79E715 provides one Watchdog Counter to serve as a system monitor, which improve the
reliability of the system. Watchdog Timer is useful for systems that are susceptible to noise, power
glitches, or electrostatic discharge. The periodic interrupt of Watchdog Timer can also serve as an
event timer or a durational system supervisor in a monitoring system which generally operates in Idle
or Power-down mode. The Watchdog Timer is basic a setting of divider that divides an internal low
speed clock source. The divider output is selectable and determines the time-out interval. When the
time-out interval is fulfilled, it will wake the system up from Idle or Power-down mode and an interrupt
event will occur. If Watchdog Timer reset is enabled, a system reset will occur after a period of delay if
without any software response.
Internal OSC
(10KHz)
FLIRC
Pre-scalar
1/1
1/2
1/8
1/16
1/32
1/64
1: ON
0: OFF 1/128
1/256
WDT Counter
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
clock
6-bit Counter
clear
....
Overflow
Checking
overflow
select
EWDI
(EIE.4)
WDT interrupt
WPS2,WPS1,WPS0
PD (PCON.1)
WIDPD
IDL (PCON.0)
WDTF
Delay 512 clock
(LIRC)
ENWDT
WDT Reset
WCLR
(written '1' by software)
EWRST
WDTRF
Figure 11-1 Watchdog Timer
11.1 Functional Description
The Watchdog Timer should first be reset 00H by using WDCLR(WDCON0.6) to ensure that the timer
starts from a known state. After disable Watchdog Timer through clearing WDTEN (WDCON0.7) will
also clear this counter. The WDCLR bit is used to reset the Watchdog Timer. This bit is self-cleared
thus the user doesn’t need to clear it. After writing 1 to WDCLR, the hardware will automatically clear
it. After WDTEN set as 1, the Watchdog Timer starts counting. The time-out interval is selected by the
three bits WPS2, WPS1, and WPS0 (WDCON0[2:0]). When the selected time-out occurs, the
Watchdog Timer will set the interrupt flag WDTF (WDCON0.5). The Watchdog Timer interrupt enable
bit locates at EIE.4 register. If Watchdog Timer reset is enabled by writing logic 1 to EWRST
(WDCON1.0) bit. An additional 512 clocks of LIRC delays to expect a counter clearing by setting
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 51 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
WDCLR. If there is no WDCLR setting during this 512-clock period, a reset will happen. Once a reset
due to Watchdog Timer occurs, the Watchdog Timer reset flag WDTRF (WDCON0.3) will be set. This
bit keeps unchanged after any reset other than a power-on reset. The user may clear WDTRF via
software. In general, software should restart the counter to put it into a known state by setting
WDCLR. The Watchdog Timer also provides a WIDPD bit (WDCON0.4) to allow the Watchdog Timer
continuing running after the system enters Idle or Power-down operating mode.
The hardware automatically clears WDT counter after entering or being woken-up from Idle or Powerdown mode. It prevents unconscious system reset.
WDCON0 – Watchdog Timer Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDTEN
WDCLR
WDTF
WIDPD
WDTRF
WPS2
WPS1
WPS0
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: D8H
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
7
WDTEN
Description
WDT Enable
WDTEN is initialized by inverted CWDTEN (CONFIG3, bit-7) at any other resets.
0 = Disable WDT at power-on reset.
1 = Enable WDT at power-on reset.
6
WDCLR
WDT Counter Clear
Writing “1” to clear the WDT counter to 0000H. Note that this bit is written-only
and has no need to be cleared by being written “0”.
5
WDTF
WDT Interrupt Flag
This bit will be set by hardware when WDT counter overflows.
4
WIDPD
WDT Running in Idle and Power-down Mode
This bit decides whether Watchdog Timer runs in Idle or Power-down mode.
0 = WDT counter is halted while CPU is in Idle or Power-down mode.
1 = WDT keeps running while CPU is in Idle or Power-down mode.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 52 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
3
WDTRF
Description
WDT Reset Flag
When the MCU resets itself, this bit is set by hardware. The bit should be cleared
by software.
If EWRST = 0, the interrupt flag WDTF won’t be set by hardware, and the MCU
will reset itself right away.
If EWRST = 1, the interrupt flag WDTF will be set by hardware and the MCU will
jump into WDT’s interrupt service routine if WDT interrupt is enabled, and the
MCU won’t reset itself until 512 CPU clocks elapse. In other words, in this
condition, the user also needs to clear the WDT counter (by writing ‘1’ to WDCLR
bit) during this period of 512 CPU clocks, or the MCU will also reset itself when
512 CPU clocks elapse.
2:0
WPS[2:0]
WDT Pre-scalar Selection
Use these bits to select WDT time-out period.
The WDT time-out period is determined by the formula =
64
,
(FLIRC × Pr e scalar)
where FLIRC is the frequency of the WDT clock source. The following table shows
an example of WDT timeout period for different FLIRC.
[1] WDTEN is initialized by reloading the inversed value of CWDTEN (CONFIG3.7) after all resets.
[2] WIDPD and WPS[2:0] are cleared after power-on reset and keep unchanged after any other resets.
[3] WDTRF will be cleared after power-on reset, be set after Watchdog Timer reset, and remains unchanged after any other
resets.
WDCON1 – Watchdog Timer Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
Address: ABH
Bit
Name
0
EWRST
3
-
2
-
1
0
EWRST
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Disable WDT Reset function.
1 = Enable WDT Reset function.
[1] EWRST is cleared after power-on reset and keeps unchanged after any other resets.
The Watchdog time-out interval is determined by the formula =
64
. Where FLIRC is the
(FLIRC × Pr e scalar)
frequency of LIRC. The following table shows an example of the Watchdog time-out interval under
different FLIRC and pre-scalars.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 53 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
EIE – Extensive Interrupt Enable
7
6
5
ET2
ESPI
EPWM
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: E8H
Bit
4
Name
EWDI
4
EWDI
R/W
3
-
2
ECPTF
R/W
1
0
EKB
EI2C
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Disable Watchdog Timer Interrupt.
1 = Enable Watchdog Timer Interrupt.
The Watchdog Timer time-out selection will result in different time-out values depending on the clock
speed. The reset, when enabled, will occur when 512 clocks after time-out has occurred.
Table 11-1 Time-out Values for the Watchdog Timer
WDT Interrupt time-out
(WPS2,WPS1,WPS0)
Pre-scalar
Number of
Clocks
6
Reset time-out
Time
Number of
Clocks
6.4ms
2 +512
6
(0,0,0)
1/1
2
(0,0,1)
1/2
2x2
6
12.8ms
2x2 +512
(0,1,0)
1/8
8x2
6
51.2ms
(0,1,1)
1/16
16x2
6
102.40ms
(1,0,0)
1/32
32x2
6
204.80ms
(1,0,1)
1/64
64x2
6
409.60ms
64x2 +512
(1,1,0)
1/128
128x2
6
819.20ms
128x2 +512
(1,1,1)
1/256
256x2
6
1.638s
256x2 +512
Time
57.6ms
6
64ms
8x2 +512
6
102.4ms
16x2 +512
6
153.6ms
32x2 +512
6
256ms
6
460.8ms
6
870.4ms
6
1.6892s
11.2 Applications of Watchdog Timer Reset
The main application of the Watchdog Timer with time-out reset enabling is for the system monitor.
This is important in real-time control applications. In case of some power glitches or electro-magnetic
interference, the processor may begin to execute erroneous codes and operate in an unpredictable
state. If this is left unchecked the entire system may crash. Using the Watchdog Timer during software
development will require the user to select ideal Watchdog reset locations for inserting instructions to
reset the Watchdog Timer. By inserting the instruction setting WDCLR, it will allow the code to run
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 54 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
without any Watchdog Timer reset. However If any erroneous code executes by any power of other
interference, the instructions to clear the Watchdog Timer counter will not be executed at the required
instants. Thus the Watchdog Timer reset will occur to reset the system start from an erroneously
executing condition. The user should remember that WDCON0 requires a timed access writing.
11.3 Applications of Watchdog Timer Interrupt
There is another application of the Watchdog Timer, which is used as a simple timer. The WDTF flag
will be set while the Watchdog Timer completes the selected time interval. The software polls the
WDTF flag to detect a time-out and the WDCLR allows software to restart the timer. The Watchdog
Timer can also be used as a very long timer. Every time the time-out occurs, an interrupt will occur if
the individual interrupt EWDI (EIE.4) and global interrupt enable EA is set.
In some application of low power consumption, the CPU usually stays in Idle mode when nothing
needs to be served to save power consumption. After a while the CPU will be woken up to check if
anything needs to be served at an interval of programmed period implemented by Timer 0, 1 or 2.
However, the current consumption of Idle mode still keeps at a “mA” level. To further reducing the
current consumption to “μA” level, the CPU should stay in Power-down mode when nothing needs to
be served, and has the ability of waking up at a programmable interval. The N79E715 is equipped with
this useful function. It provides a very low power LIRC. Along with the low power consumption
application, the Watchdog Timer needs to count under Idle and Power-down mode and wake CPU up
from Idle or Power-down mode. The demo code to accomplish this feature is shown below.
The demo code of Watchdog Timer wakes CPU up from Power Down.
ORG
LJMP
0000H
START
ORG
LJMP
0053H
WDT_ISR
ORG
WDT_ISR:
CLR
MOV
MOV
ORL
INC
MOV
SETB
CLR
MOV
MOV
ANL
SETB
RETI
Jan. 6, 2016
0100H
EA
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#01000000B
ACC
P0,ACC
EA
EA
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#11011111B
EA
;clear Watchdog Timer counter
;clear Watchdog Timer interrupt flag
Page 55 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
START:
MOV
MOV
ORL
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#01000000B
;clear Watchdog Timer counter
MOV
MOV
ORL
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#10000000B
;enable Watchdog Timer to run
Check_clear:
MOV
A,WDCON0
JB
ACC.6,Check_clear
MOV
MOV
ORL
MOV
MOV
ANL
SETB
MOV
MOV
SETB
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#00000111B
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON1,#11111110B
EWDI
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WIDPD
SETB
EA
;choose interval length
;disable Watchdog Timer reset
;enable Watchdog Timer interrupt
;********************************************************************
;Enter Power-down mode
;********************************************************************
LOOP:
ORL
PCON,#02H
LJMP
LOOP
END
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 56 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
12 Serial Port (UART)
The N79E715 includes one enhanced full duplex serial port with automatic address recognition and
framing error detection. The serial port supports three modes of full duplex UART (Universal
Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter) in Mode 1, 2, and 3. This means it can transmit and receive
simultaneously. The serial port is also receiving-buffered, which means that it can commence
reception of a second byte before a previously received byte has been read from the register. The
receiving and transmitting registers are both accessed at SBUF. Writing to SBUF loads the
transmitting register, and reading SBUF accesses a physically separate receiving register. There are
four operation modes in serial port. In all four modes, transmission initiates by any instruction that
uses SBUF as a destination register. Note that before serial port function works, the port latch bits of
RXD and TXD pins have to be set to 1. UART_Sel (AUXR1.6) supports software switches two groups
of UART pin.
SCON – Serial Port Control (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
SM0/FE
SM1
SM2
REN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 98H
Bit
Name
Description
7
SM0/FE
Serial Port Mode Selection
6
SM1
3
TB8
R/W
2
RB8
R/W
1
0
TI
RI
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
SMOD0 (PCON.6) = 0:
See Table 12–1 Serial Port Mode Description for details.
SMOD0 (PCON.6) = 1:
SM0/FE bit is used as frame error (FE) status flag.
0 = Frame error (FE) does not occur.
1 = Frame error (FE) occurs and is detected.
5
SM2
Multiprocessor Communication Mode Enable
The function of this bit is dependent on the serial port mode.
Mode 0:
This bit select the baud rate between FSYS/12 and FSYS/4.
0 = The clock runs at FSYS/12 baud rate. It maintains standard 8051
compatibility.
1 = The clock runs at FSYS/4 baud rate for faster serial communication.
Mode 1:
This bit checks valid stop bit.
0 = Reception is always valid no matter the logic level of stop bit.
1 = Reception is valid only when the received stop bit is logic 1 and the
received data matches GIVEN or BROADCAST address.
Mode 2 or 3:
For multiprocessor communication.
th
0 = Reception is always valid no matter the logic level of the 9 bit.
th
1 = Reception is valid only when the received 9 bit is logic 1 and the
received data matches GIVEN or BROADCAST address.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 57 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
4
REN
Receiving Enable
0 = Serial port reception is disabled.
1 = Serial port reception is enabled in Mode 1,2, and 3. In Mode 0, clearing and
then setting REN initiates one-byte reception. After reception is complete, this
bit will not be cleared via hardware. The user should clear and set REN again
via software to triggering the next byte reception.
3
TB8
9 Transmitted Bit
th
This bit defines the state of the 9 transmission bit in serial port Mode 2 and 3. It
is not used in Mode0 and 1.
2
RB8
9 Received Bit
th
The bit identifies the logic level of the 9 received bit in Modes 2 and 3. In Mode
1, if SM2 0, RB8 is the logic level of the received stop bit. RB8 is not used in
Mode 0.
1
TI
Transmission Interrupt Flag
This flag is set via hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by the
th
UART after the 8 bit in Mode 0 or the last bit of data in other modes. When the
UART interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to execute the UART
interrupt service routine. This bit should be cleared manually via software.
0
RI
Receiving Interrupt Flag
This flag is set via hardware when a 8-bit or 9-bit data has been received by the
th
UART after the 8 bit in Mode 0, after sampling the stop bit in Mode 1, or after
th
sampling the 9 bit in Mode 2 and 3. SM2 bit has restriction for exception. When
the UART interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to execute to the
UART interrupt service routine. This bit should be cleared manually via software.
th
th
Table 12–1 Serial Port Mode Description
Mod
e
SM
0
SM
1
Description
Frame
Bits
0
0
0
Synchronous
8
FSYS divided by 12 or by 4
1
0
1
Asynchronous
10
Timer 1 overflow rate divided by 32 or divided by 16
2
1
0
Asynchronous
11
FSYS divided by 64 or 32
3
1
1
Asynchronous
11
Timer 1 overflow rate divided by 32 or divided by 16
Baud Rate
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1] While SM2 (SCON.5) is logic 1.
[2] While SMOD (PCON.7) is logic 1.
PCON – Power Control
7
6
SMOD
SMOD0
R/W
R/W
Address: 87H
5
-
4
3
2
1
0
POF
GF1
GF0
PD
IDL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
Description
7
SMOD
Serial Port Double Baud Rate Enable
Setting this bit doubles the serial port baud rate in UART mode 2 and mode 1 or 3
only if Timer 1 overflow is used as the baud rate source. See Table 12–1 Serial
Port Mode Description for details.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 58 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
6
SMOD0
Framing Error Detection Enable
0 = Framing error detection is disabled. SM0/FE (SCON.7) bit is used as SM0 as
standard 80C51 function.
1 = Framing error detection is enabled. SM0/FE bit is used as frame error (FE)
status flag.
SBUF – Serial Data Buffer
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBUF[7:0]
R/W
Address: 99H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
SBUF[7:0]
Description
Serial Data Buffer
This byte actually consists of two separate registers. One is the receiving
resister, and the other is the transmitting buffer. When data is moved to SBUF, it
goes to the transmitting buffer and is shifted for serial transmission. When data
is moved from SBUF, it comes from the receiving buffer.
The transmission is initiated through moving a byte to SBUF.
AUXR1 – AUX Function Resgister-1
7
6
5
SPI_Sel
UART_Sel
R/W
R/W
Address: A2H
Bit
Name
6
UART_Sel
4
-
3
DisP26
R/W
2
-
1
0
0
DPS
R
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Select P1.0, P1.1 as UART pins.
1 = Select P2.6, P2.7 as UART pins.
12.1 Mode 0
Mode 0 provides synchronous communication with external devices. Serial data enters and exits
through RXD pin. TXD outputs the shift clock. 8 bits are transmitted or received. Mode 0 therefore
provides half-duplex communication because the transmitting or receiving data is via the same data
line RXD. The baud rate is enhanced to be selected as FSYS/12 if SM2 (SCON.5) is 0 or as FSYS/4 if
SM2 is 1. Note that whenever transmitting or receiving, the serial clock is always generated by the
microcontroller. Thus any device on the serial port in Mode 0 should accept the microcontroller as the
Master. Figure 12-1 shows a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in Mode 0 and associated
timing.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 59 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 12-1 Serial Port Mode 0 Function Block
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 60 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
As shown, there is one bidirectional data line (RXD) and one shift clock line (TXD). The shift clock is
used to shift data in or out of the serial port controller bit by bit for a serial communication. Data bits
enter or exit LSB first. The band rate is equal to the shift clock frequency.
Transmission is initiated by any instruction writes to SBUF. The control block will then shift out the
clock and begin to transfer data until all 8 bits are complete. Then the transmitted flag TI (SCON.1) will
be set 1 to indicate one byte transmitting complete.
Reception is initiated by clearing and then setting REN (SCON.4) while RI (SCON..0) is 0. This
condition tells the serial port controller that there is data to be shifted in. This process will continue
until 8 bits have been received. Then the received flag RI will be set as 1. Note that REN will not be
cleared via hardware. The user should first clear RI, clear REN and then set REN again via software
to triggering the next byte reception.
12.2 Mode 1
Mode 1 supports asynchronous, full duplex serial communication. The asynchronous mode is
commonly used for communication with PCs, modems or other similar interfaces. In Mode 1, 10 bits
are transmitted (through TXD) or received (through RXD) including a start bit (logic 0), 8 data bits
(LSB first) and a stop bit (logic 1). The baud rate is determined by the Timer 1. SMOD (PCON.7)
setting 1 makes the baud rate double while Timer 1 is selected as the clock source. Figure 12–12-2
shows a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in Mode 1 and associated timings for
transmitting and receiving.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 61 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 12–12-2 Serial Port Mode 1 Function Block and Timing Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 62 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Transmission is initiated by any writing instructions to SBUF. Transmission takes place on TXD pin.
First the start bit comes out, the 8-bit data follows to be shifted out and then ends with a stop bit. After
the stop bit appears, TI (SCON.1) will be set to indicate one byte transmission complete. All bits are
shifted out depending on the rate determined by the baud rate generator.
Once the baud rate generator is activated and REN (SCON.4) is 1, the reception can begin at any
time. Reception is initiated by a detected 1-to-0 transition at RXD. Data will be sampled and shifted in
at the selected baud rate. In the midst of the stop bit, certain conditions should be met to LOAD SBUF
with the received data:
1. RI (SCON.0) = 0, and
2. Either SM2 (SCON.5) = 0, or the received stop bit = 1 while SM2 = 1.
If these conditions are met, the SBUF will be loaded with the received data, the RB8 (SCON.2) with
stop bit, and RI will be set. If these conditions fail, there will be no data loaded and RI will remain 0.
After above receiving progress, the serial control will look forward another 1-0 transition on RXD pin to
start next data reception.
12.3 Mode 2
Mode 2 supports asynchronous, full duplex serial communication. Different from Mode1, there are 11
bits to be transmitted or received. They are a start bit (logic 0), 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable
th
th
9 bit TB8 or RB8 bit and a stop bit (logic 1). The most common use of 9 bit is to put the parity bit in
it. The baud rate is fixed as 1/32 or 1/64 the system clock frequency depending on SMOD bit. Figure
12-3 shows a simplified functional diagram of the serial port in Mode 2 and associated timings for
transmitting and receiving.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 63 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 12-3 Serial Port Mode 2 Function Block and Timing Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 64 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Transmission is initiated by any writing instructions to SBUF. Transmission takes place on TXD pin.
First the start bit comes out, the 8-bit data and bit TB8 (SCON.3) follows to be shifted out and then
ends with a stop bit. After the stop bit appears, TI will be set to indicate the transmission complete.
While REN is set, the reception is allowed at any time. A falling edge of a start bit on RXD will initiate
the reception progress. Data will be sampled and shifted in at the selected baud rate. In the midst of
th
the 9 bit, certain conditions should be met to LOAD SBUF with the received data:
1. RI (SCON.0) = 0, and
th
2. Either SM2(SCON.5) = 0, or the received 9 bit = 1 while SM2 = 1.
If these conditions are met, the SBUF will be loaded with the received data, the RB8(SCON.2) with
TB8 bit and RI will be set. If these conditions fail, there will be no data loaded and RI will remain 0.
After above receiving progress, the serial control will look forward another 1-0 transition on RXD pin to
start next data reception.
12.4 Mode 3
Mode 3 has the same operation as Mode 2, except its baud rate clock source. As shown is Figure
12-4, Mode 3 uses Timer 1 overflow as its baud rate clock.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 65 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 12-4 Serial Port Mode 3 Function Block
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 66 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
12.5 Baud Rates
Table 12–2 UART Baud Rate Formulas
UART Mode
Baud Rate Clock Source
Baud Rate
0
Oscillator
FSYS / 12 or FSYS / 4 [1]
2
Oscillator
2SMOD
FSYS
64
1 or 3
Timer/Counter 1 overflow
[2]
FSYS
FSYS
2SMOD
2SMOD
[3]
or
32
12 256 TH1
32
4 256 TH1
[1] While SM2 (SCON.5) is set as logic 1.
[2] Timer 1 is configured as a timer in auto-reload mode (Mode 2).
[3] While T1M (CKCON.4) is set as logic 1.
Note that in using Timer 1 as the baud rate generator, the interrupt should be disabled. The Timer
itself can be configured for either “Timer” or “Counter” operation. And Timer 1 can be in any of its 3
running modes. In the most typical applications, it is configured for “Timer” operation, in the autoreload mode (Mode2). If Timer 1 is used as the baud rate generator, the reloaded value is stored in
TH1. Therefore the baud rate is determined by TH1 value.
Table 12–3 lists various commonly used baud rates and how they can be obtained from Timer 1. In
this mode, Timer 1 operates with divided-by-12 pre-scale, as an auto-reload Timer with SMOD
(PCON.7) is 0. If SMOD is 1, the baud rate will be doubled.
Table 12–3 Timer 1 Generated Commonly Used Baud Rates
TH1 reload value
Baud Rate
Oscillator Frequency (MHz)
11.0592
14.7456
18.432
57600
22.1184
FFh
38400
FFh
19200
FEh
FDh
9600
FDh
FCh
FBh
FAh
4800
FAh
F8h
F6h
F4h
2400
F4h
F0h
ECh
E8h
1200
E8h
E0h
D8h
D0h
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 67 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
12.6 Framing Error Detection
Framing error detection is provided for asynchronous modes (Mode 1, 2 and 3.) The framing error
occurs when a valid stop bit is not detected due to the bus noise or contention. The UART can detect
a framing error and notify the software.
The framing error bit, FE, is located in SCON.7. This bit normally serves as SM0. While the framing
error detection enable bit SMOD0 (PCON.6) is set 1, it serves as FE flag. Actually SM0 and FE locate
in different registers.
The FE bit will be set 1 via hardware while a framing error occurs. It should be cleared via software.
Note that SMOD0 should be 1 while reading or writing to FE. If FE is set, any of the following frames
received without any error will not clear the FE flag. The clearing has to be done via software.
12.7 Multiprocessor Communication
The communication feature of the N79E715 enables a Master device send a multiple frame serial
message to a Slave device in a multi-slave configuration. It does this without interrupting other slave
devices that may be on the same serial line. UART mode 2 or 3 mode can use this feature only. After
9 data bits are received. The 9
th
bit value is written to RB8 (SCON.2). The user can enable this
function by setting SM2 (SCON.5) as logic 1 so that when the stop bit is received, the serial interrupt
will be generated only if RB8 is 1. When the SM2 bit is 1, serial data frames that are received with the
th
th
9 bit as 0 do not generate an interrupt. In this case, the 9 bit simply separates the address from the
serial data.
When the Master device wants to transmit a block of data to one of several slaves on a serial line, it
first sends out an address byte to identify the target slave. Note that in this case, an address byte
th
differs from a data byte: In an address byte, the 9 bit is 1 and in a data byte, it is 0. The address byte
interrupts all slaves so that each slave can examine the received byte and see if it is being addressed.
The addressed slave then clears its SM2 bit and prepares to receive incoming data bytes. The SM2
bits of slaves that were not addressed remain set, and they continue operating normally while ignoring
the incoming data bytes.
Follow the steps below to configure multiprocessor communications:
1. Set all devices (Masters and Slaves) to UART mode 2 or 3.
2. Write the SM2 bit of all the Slave devices to 1.
3. The Master device's transmission protocol is:
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 68 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
th
– First byte: the address, identifying the target slave device, (9 bit = 1).
th
– Next bytes: data, (9 bit = 0).
th
4. When the target Slave receives the first byte, all of the Slaves are interrupted because the 9 data
bit is 1. The targeted Slave compares the address byte to its own address and then clears its SM2 bit
to receiving incoming data. The other slaves continue operating normally.
5. After all data bytes have been received, set SM2 back to 1 to wait for next address.
SM2 has no effect in Mode 0, and in Mode 1 can be used to check the validity of the stop bit. For
mode 1 reception, if SM2 is 1, the receiving interrupt will not be issue unless a valid stop bit is
received.
12.8 Automatic Address Recognition
The automatic address recognition is a feature which enhances the multiprocessor communication
feature by allowing the UART to recognize certain addresses in the serial bit stream by using
hardware to make the comparisons. This feature saves a great deal of software overhead by
eliminating the need for the software to examine every serial address which passes by the serial port.
Only when the serial port recognizes its own address, the receiver sets RI bit to request an interrupt.
The automatic address recognition feature is enabled when the multiprocessor communication feature
is enabled. (SM2 is set.)
If desired, the user may enable the automatic address recognition feature in Mode 1. In this
configuration, the stop bit takes the place of the ninth data bit. RI is set only when the received
command frame address matches the device’s address and is terminated by a valid stop bit.
Using the automatic address recognition feature allows a master to selectively communicate with one
or more slaves by invoking the “Given” slave address or addresses. All of the slaves may be contacted
by using the “Broadcast” address. Two SFRs are used to define the slave address, SADDR, and the
slave address mask, SADEN. SADEN is used to define which bits in the SADDR are to be used and
which bits are “don’t care”. The SADEN mask can be logically ANDed with the SADDR to create the
“Given” address which the master will use for addressing each of the slaves. Use of the “Given”
address allows multiple slaves to be recognized while excluding others.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 69 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
SADDR – Slave Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SADDR[7:0]
R/W
Address: A9H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
SADDR[7:0]
Description
Slave Address
This byte specifies the microcontroller’s own slave address for UART
multiprocessor communication.
SADEN – Slave Address Mask
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SADEN[7:0]
R/W
Address: B9H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
SADEN[7:0]
Description
Slave Address Mask
This byte is a mask byte that contains “don’t-care” bits (defined by zeros) to
form the device’s given address. The don’t-care bits provide the flexibility to
address one or more Slaves at a time.
The following examples will help to show the versatility of this scheme.
Example 1, slave 0:
SADDR = 11000000b
SADEN = 11111101b
Given = 110000X0b
Example 2, slave 1:
SADDR = 11000000b
SADEN = 11111110b
Given = 1100000Xb
In the above example SADDR is the same and the SADEN data is used to differentiate between the
two slaves. Slave 0 requires a 0 in bit 0 and it ignores bit 1. Slave 1 requires a 0 in bit 1 and bit 0 is
ignored. A unique address for Slave 0 would be 1100 0010B since slave 1 requires a 0 in bit 1. A
unique address for slave 1 would be 11000001b since a 1 in bit 0 will exclude slave 0. Both slaves can
be selected at the same time by an address which has bit 0 = 0 (for slave 0) and bit 1 = 0 (for slave 1).
Thus, both could be addressed with 11000000b.
In a more complex system the following could be used to select slaves 1 and 2 while excluding slave
0:
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 70 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Example 1, slave 0:
SADDR = 11000000b
SADEN = 11111001b
Given = 11000XX0b
Example 2, slave 1:
SADDR = 11100000b
SADEN = 11111010b
Given = 11100X0Xb
Example 3, slave 2:
SADDR = 11000000b
SADEN = 11111100b
Given = 110000XXb
In the above example the differentiation among the 3 slaves is in the lower 3 address bits. Slave 0
requires that bit 0 = 0 and it can be uniquely addressed by 11100110b. Slave 1 requires that bit 1 = 0
and it can be uniquely addressed by 11100101b. Slave 2 requires that bit 2 = 0 and its unique address
is 11100011b. To select Slaves 0 and 1 and exclude Slave 2 use address 11100100b, since it is
necessary to make bit 2 = 1 to exclude slave 2. The “Broadcast” address for each slave is created by
taking the logical OR of SADDR and SADEN. Zeros in this result are treated as “don’t care”. In most
cases, interpreting the “don’t care” as ones, the broadcast address will be FFH.
On reset, SADDR and SADEN are initialized to 00H. This produces a “Given” address of all “don’t
care” as well as a “Broadcast” address of all XXXXXXXXb (all “don’t care” bits). This effectively
disables the automatic addressing mode and allows the microcontroller to use standard UART drivers
which do not make use of this feature.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 71 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
13 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
13.1 Features
The N79E715 exists a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) block to support high-speed serial
communication. SPI is a full-duplex, high-speed, synchronous communication bus between MCUs or
other peripheral devices such as serial EEPROM, LCD driver, or D/A converter. It provides either
Master or Slave mode, high-speed rate up to FSYS/16 for Master mode and FSYS/4 for Slave mode,
transfer complete and write collision flag. For a multi-master system, SPI supports Master Mode Fault
to protect a multi-master conflict.
13.2 Functional Description
FSYS
S
M
MSB
8-bit Shift Register
Read Data Buffer
Select
M
S
CLOCK
SPR0
SPR1
LSB
MISO
MOSI
Pin Contorl Logic
Divider
/16, /32, /64, /128
Clock Logic
SPCLK
SSOE
DISMODF
SPIEN
MSTR
SS
MSTR
SPI Status Register
SPI Interrupt
Request
SPR1
SPR0
CPHA
CPOL
LSBFE
MSTR
SSOE
SPIEN
SPIEN
DISMODF
MODF
SPIOVF
WCOL
SPIF
SPI Status Control Logic
SPI Control Register
Internal
Data Bus
Figure 13-1 SPI Block Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 72 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 13–1 shows SPI block diagram and provides an overview of SPI architecture in this device. The
main blocks of SPI are the SPI control register logic, SPI status logic, clock rate control logic, and pin
control logic. For a serial data transfer or receiving, The SPI block exists a shift register and a read
data buffer. It is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receiving direction.
Transmit data cannot be written to the shifter until the previous transfer is complete. Receiving logic
consists of parallel read data buffer so the shift register is free to accept a second data, as the first
received data will be transferred to the read data buffer.
The four pins of SPI interface are Master-In/Slave-Out (MISO), Master-Out/Slave-In (MOSI), Shift
Clock (SPCLK), and Slave Select ( SS ). The MOSI pin is used to transfer a 8-bit data in series from
the Master to the Slave. Therefore, MOSI is an output pin for Master device and a input for Slave.
Respectively, the MISO is used to receive a serial data from the Slave to the Master.
The SPCLK pin is the clock output in Master mode, but is the clock input in Slave mode. The shift
clock is used to synchronize the data movement both in and out of the devices through their MOSI and
MISO pins. The shift clock is driven by the Master mode device for eight clock cycles which
exchanges one byte data on the serial lines. For the shift clock is always produced out of the Master
device, the system should never exist more than one device in Master mode for avoiding device
conflict. It is strongly recommended that the Schmitt trigger input buffer be enabled.
Each Slave peripheral is selected by one Slave Select pin ( SS ). The signal should stay low for any
Slave access. When SS is driven high, the Slave device will be inactivated. If the system is multislave, there should be only one Slave device selected at the same time. In the Master mode MCU, the
SS pin does not function and it can be configured as a general purpose I/O. However, SS can be
used as Master Mode Fault detection (see Section 13.7 “Mode Fault Detection”) via software setting if
multi-master environment exists. The N79E715 also provides auto-activating function to toggle SS
between each byte-transfer.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 73 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Master/Slave
MCU1
Master/Slave
MCU2
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SPCLK
Slave device 1
Slave device 2
I/O
PORT
SO
SI
SCK
SS
SO
SI
SS
SCK
0
1
2
3
SO
0
1
2
3
SI
SS
SCK
SS
SS
I/O
PORT
SPCLK
Slave device 3
Figure 13-2 SPI Multi-master, Multi-slave Interconnection
Figure 13-2 shows a typical interconnection of SPI devices. The bus generally connects devices
together through three signal wires, MOSI to MOSI, MISO to MISO, and SPCLK to SPCLK. The
Master devices select the individual Slave devices by using four pins of a parallel port to control the
four SS pins. MCU1 and MCU2 play either Master or Slave mode. The SS should be configured as
Master Mode Fault detection to avoid multi-master conflict.
MOSI
MOSI
MISO
MISO
SPI shift register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPI shift register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPCLK SPCLK
SPI clock
generator
SS
Master MCU
*
SS
VSS
Slave MCU
* SS configuration follows DISMODF and SSOE bits.
Figure 13-3 SPI Single-master, Single-slave Interconnection
Figure 13-3 shows the simplest SPI system interconnection, single-master and signal-slave. During a
transfer, the Master shifts data out to the Slave via MOSI line. While simultaneously, the Master shifts
data in from the Slave via MISO line. The two shift registers in the Master MCU and the Slave MCU
can be considered as one 16-bit circular shift register. Therefore, while a transfer data pushed from
Master into Slave, the data in Slave will also be pulled in Master device respectively. The transfer
effectively exchanges the data which was in the SPI shift registers of the two MCUs.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 74 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
By default, SPI data is transferred MSB first. If the LSBFE (SPCR.5) is set, SPI data shifts LSB first.
This bit does not affect the position of the MSB and LSB in the data register. Note that all following
Description and figures are under the condition of LSBFE logic 0. MSB is transmitted and received
first.
13.3 SPI Control Registers
There are three SPI registers to support its operations, they are SPI control register (SPCR), SPI
status register (SPSR), and SPI data register (SPDR). These registers provide control, status, data
storage functions, and clock rate selection. The following registers relate to SPI function.
SPI_Sel (AUXR1.7) supports software switches between two groups of SPI pin.
AUXR1 – AUX Function Resgister-1
7
6
5
SPI_Sel
UART_Sel
R/W
R/W
Address: A2H
Bit
Name
7
SPI_Sel
4
-
3
DisP26
R/W
2
-
1
0
0
DPS
R
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
2
CPHA
R/W
1
0
SPR1
SPR0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Select P1.7, P1.6, P1.4, and P0.0 as SPI pins.
1 = Select P2.2, P2.3, P2.4, and P2.5 as SPI pins.
SPCR – Serial Peripheral Control Register
7
6
5
4
SSOE
SPIEN
LSBFE
MSTR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: F3H
Bit
Name
Description
7
SSOE
Slave Select Output Enable
3
CPOL
R/W
This bit is used in combination with the DISMODF (SPSR.3) bit to determine the
feature of SS pin. This bit takes effect only under MSTR = 1 and DISMODF = 1
condition.
0 = SS functions as a general purpose I/O pin.
1 = SS automatically goes low for each transmission when selecting external
Slave device and goes high during each idle state to de-select the Slave device.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 75 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
6
SPIEN
SPI Enable
0 = Disable SPI function.
1 = Enable SPI function.
5
LSBFE
LSB First Enable
0 = The SPI data is transferred MSB first.
1 = The SPI data is transferred LSB first.
4
MSTR
Master Mode Enable
This bit switches the SPI operating between Master and Slave modes.
0 = The SPI is configured as Slave mode.
1 = The SPI is configured as Master mode.
3
CPOL
SPI Clock Polarity Selection
CPOL bit determines the idle state level of the SPI clock. Refer to Figure 13-4 SPI
Clock Format
0 = SPI clock is low in idle state.
1 = SPI clock is high in idle state.
2
CPHA
SPI Clock Phase Selection
CPHA bit determines the data sampling edge of the SPI clock. Refer to Figure
13-4 SPI Clock Format.
0 = The data is sampled on the first edge of the SPI clock.
1 = The data is sampled on the second edge of the SPI clock.
1
SPR1
SPI Clock Rate Selection
0
SPR0
The two bits select four grades of SPI clock divider.
SPR1 SPR0 Divider SPI clock rate
0
0
16
1.25M bit/s
0
1
32
625k bit/s
1
0
64
312k bit/s
1
1
128
156k bit/s
The clock rates above are illustrated under FSYS = 20 MHz condition.
Table 13–1 Slave Select Pin Configuration
DISMODF
SSOE
Master Mode (MSTR = 1)
0
x
SS input for Mode Fault
1
0
General purpose I/O
Slave Mode (MSTR = 0)
SS Input for Slave select
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 76 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
1
1
Automatic SS output
SPSR – Serial Peripheral Status Register
7
6
5
4
SPIF
WCOL
SPIOVF
MODF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: F4H
Bit
Name
7
SPIF
3
DISMODF
R/W
2
-
1
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
SPI Complete Flag
This bit is set to logic 1 via hardware while an SPI data transfer is complete or an
receiving data has been moved into the SPI read buffer. If ESPI (EIE .6) and EA
are enabled, an SPI interrupt will be required. This bit should be cleared via
software. Attempting to write to SPDR is inhibited if SPIF is set.
6
WCOL
Write Collision Error Flag
This bit indicates a write collision event. Once a write collision event occurs, this
bit will be set. It should be cleared via software.
5
SPIOVF
SPI Overrun Error Flag
This bit indicates an overrun event. Once an overrun event occurs, this bit will be
set. If ESPI and EA are enabled, an SPI interrupt will be required. This bit should
be cleared via software.
4
MODF
Mode Fault Error Flag
This bit indicates a Mode Fault error event. If SS pin is configured as Mode
Fault input (MSTR = 1 and DISMODF = 0) and SS is pulled low by external
devices, a Mode Fault error occurs. Instantly MODF will be set as logic 1. If ESPI
and EA are enabled, an SPI interrupt will be required. This bit should be cleared
via software.
3
DISMODF
Mode Fault Error Detection Disable
This bit is used in combination with the SSOE (SPCR.7) bit to determine the
feature of SS pin. DISMODF affects only in Master mode (MSTR = 1).
0 = Mode Fault detection is not disabled. SS serves as input pin for Mode Fault
detection disregard of SSOE.
1 = Mode Fault detection is disabled. The feature of SS follows SSOE bit.
2:0
Jan. 6, 2016
-
Reserved
Page 77 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
SPDR – Serial Peripheral Data Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPDR[7:0]
R/W
Address: F5H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
SPDR[7:0]
Description
Serial Peripheral Data
This byte is used for transmitting or receiving data on SPI bus. A write of this
byte is a write to the shift register. A read of this byte is actually a read of the
read data buffer. In Master mode, a write to this register initiates transmission
and reception of a byte simultaneously.
13.4 Operating Modes
13.4.1
Master Mode
The SPI can operate in Master mode while MSTR (SPCR.4) is set as 1. Only one Master SPI device
can initiate transmissions. A transmission always begins by Master through writing to SPDR. The byte
written to SPDR begins shifting out on MOSI pin under the control of SPCLK. Simultaneously, another
byte shifts in from the Slave on the MISO pin. After 8-bit data transfer complete, SPIF (SPSR.7) will
automatically set via hardware to indicate one byte data transfer complete. At the same time, the data
received from the Slave is also transferred in SPDR. The user can clear SPIF and read data out of
SPDR.
13.4.2
Slave Mode
When MSTR is 0, the SPI operates in Slave mode. The SPCLK pin becomes input and it will be
clocked by another Master SPI device. The SS pin also becomes input. The Master device cannot
exchange data with the Slave device until the SS pin of the Slave device is externally pulled low.
Before data transmissions occurs, the SS of the Slave device should be pulled and remain low until
the transmission is complete. If SS goes high, the SPI is forced into idle state. If the SS is force to
high at the middle of transmission, the transmission will be aborted and the rest bits of the receiving
shifter buffer will be high and goes into idle state.
In Slave mode, data flows from the Master to the Slave on MOSI pin and flows from the Slave to the
Master on MISO pin. The data enters the shift register under the control of the SPCLK from the Master
device. After one byte is received in the shift register, it is immediately moved into the read data buffer
and the SPIF bit is set. A read of the SPDR is actually a read of the read data buffer. To prevent an
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 78 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
overrun and the loss of the byte that caused by the overrun, the Slave should read SPDR out and the
first SPIF should be cleared before a second transfer of data from the Master device comes in the
read data buffer.
13.5 Clock Formats and Data Transfer
To accommodate a wide variety of synchronous serial peripherals, the SPI has a clock polarity bit
CPOL (SPCR.3) and a clock phase bit CPHA (SPCR.2). Figure 13-4 SPI Clock Format shows that
CPOL and CPHA compose four different clock formats. The CPOL bit denotes the SPCLK line level in
ISP idle state. The CPHA bit defines the edge on which the MOSI and MISO lines are sampled. The
CPOL and CPHA should be identical for the Master and Slave devices on the same system.
Communicating in different data formats with one another will result in undetermined results.
Clock Phase (CPHA)
CPOL = 0
CPHA = 1
sample
sample
sample
sample
CPOL = 1
Clock Polarity (CPOH)
CPHA = 0
Figure 13-4 SPI Clock Format
In SPI, a Master device always initiates the transfer. If SPI is selected as Master mode (MSTR = 1)
and enabled (SPIEN = 1), writing to the SPI data register (SPDR) by the Master device starts the SPI
clock and data transfer. After shifting one byte out and receiving one byte in, the SPI clock stops and
SPIF (SPSR.7) in both Master and Slave are set. If SPI interrupt enable bit ESPI (EIE.6) is set 1 and
global interrupt is enabled (EA = 1), the interrupt service routine (ISR) of SPI will be executed.
Concerning the Slave mode, the SS signal needs to be taken care. As shown in Figure 13-4 SPI
Clock Format, when CPHA = 0, the first SPCLK edge is the sampling strobe of MSB (for an example
of LSBFE = 0, MSB first). Therefore, the Slave should shift its MSB data before the first SPCLK edge.
The falling edge of SS is used for preparing the MSB on MISO line. The SS pin therefore should
toggle high and then low between each successive serial byte. Furthermore, if the slave writes data to
the SPI data register (SPDR) while SS is low, a write collision error occurs.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 79 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
When CPHA = 1, the sampling edge thus locates on the second edge of SPCLK clock. The Slave
uses the first SPCLK clock to shift MSB out rather than the SS falling edge. Therefore, the SS line
can remain low between successive transfers. This format may be preferred in systems having single
fixed Master and single fixed Slave. The SS line of the unique Slave device can be tied to VSS as long
as only CPHA = 1 clock mode is used.
Note: The SPI should be configured before it is enabled (SPIEN = 1), or a change of LSBFE, MSTR, CPOL,
CPHA and SPR[1:0] will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state. Prior to
any configuration bit changed, SPIEN should be disabled first.
SPCLK Cycles
1
SPCLK Cycles
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SPCLK (CPOL=0)
SPCLK (CPOL=1)
Transfer Progress[1]
(internal signal)
MOSI
MISO
MSB
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
LSB
Input to Slave SS
SS output of Master[2]
SPIF (Master)
SPIF (Slave)
[1] Transfer progress starts by a writing SPDR of Master MCU.
[2] SS automatic output affects when MSTR = DISMODF = SSOE = 1.
Figure 13-5 SPI Clock and Data Format with CPHA = 0
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 80 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
SPCLK Cycles
SPCLK Cycles
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
SPCLK (CPOL=0)
SPCLK (CPOL=1)
Transfer Progress[1]
(internal signal)
MOSI
MSB
MISO
LSB
[3]
[4]
Input to Slave SS
SS output of Master[2]
SPIF (Master)
SPIF (Slave)
[1] Transfer progress starts by a writing SPDR of Master MCU.
[2] SS automatic output affects when DISMODF = SSOE = MSTR = 1.
[3] If SS of Slave is low, the MISO will be the LSB of previous data. Otherwise, MISO will be high.
[4] While SS stays low, the LSB will last its state. Once SS is released to high, MISO will switch to high level.
Figure 13-6 SPI Clock and Data Format with CPHA = 1
13.6 Slave Select Pin Configuration
The N79E715 SPI provides a flexible SS pin feature for different system requirements. When the SPI
operates as a Slave, SS pin always rules as Slave select input. When the Master mode is enabled,
SS has three different functions according to DISMODF (SPSR.3) and SSOE (SPCR.7). By default,
DISMODF is 0. It means that the Mode Fault detection activates. SS is configured as a input pin to
check if the Mode Fault appears. On the contrary, if DISMODF is 1, Mode Fault is inactivated and the
SSOE bit takes over to control the function of the SS pin. While SSOE is 1, it means the Slave select
signal will generate automatically to select a Slave device. The SS as output pin of the Master usually
connects with the SS input pin of the Slave device. The SS output automatically goes low for each
transmission when selecting external Slave device and goes high during each idle state to de-select
the Slave device. While SSOE is 0 and DISMODF is 1, SS is no more used by the SPI and reverts to
be a general purpose I/O pin.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 81 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
13.7 Mode Fault Detection
The Mode Fault detection is useful in a system where more than one SPI devices might become
Masters at the same time. It may induce data contention. A Mode Fault error occurs once the SS is
pulled low by others. It indicates that some other SPI device is trying to address this Master as if it is a
Slave. Instantly the MSTR and SPIEN control bits in the SPCR are cleared via hardware to disable
SPI, Mode Fault flag MODF (SPSR.4) is set and an interrupt is generated if ESPI (EIE .6) and EA are
enabled.
13.8 Write Collision Error
The SPI is signal buffered in the transfer direction and double buffered in the receiving direction. New
data for transmission cannot be written to the shift register until the previous transaction is complete.
Write collision occurs while an attempt was made to write data to the SPDR while a transfer was in
progress. SPDR is not double buffered in the transmit direction. Any writing to SPDR cause data to be
written directly into the SPI shift register. Once a write collision error is generated, WCOL (SPSR.6)
will be set as 1 via hardware to indicate a write collision. In this case, the current transferring data
continues its transmission. However the new data that caused the collision will be lost. Although the
SPI logic can detect write collisions in both Master and Slave modes, a write collision is normally a
Slave error because a Slave has no indicator when a Master initiates a transfer. During the receive of
Slave, a write to SPDAT causes a write collision under Slave mode. WCOL flag needs to be cleared
via software.
13.9 Overrun Error
For receiving data, the SPI is double buffered in the receiving direction. The received data is
transferred into a parallel read data buffer so the shifter is free to accept a second serial byte.
However, the received data should be read from SPDR before the next data has been completely
shifted in. As long as the first byte is read out of the read data buffer and SPIF is cleared before the
next byte is ready to be transferred, no overrun error condition occurs. Otherwise the overrun error
occurs. In this condition, the second byte data will not be successfully received to the read data
register and the previous data will remain. If overrun occur, SPIOVF (SPSR.5) will be set via
hardware. This will also require an interrupt if enabled. Figure 13-7 SPI Overrun Waveform shows the
relationship between the data receiving and the overrun error.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 82 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Data[n] Receiving Begins
Shift Register
Data[n+1] Receiving Begins
Shifting Data[n] in
SPIF
Data[n+2] Receiveing Begins
Shifting Data[n+1] in
Shifting Data[n+2] in
[1]
[3]
Read Data Buffer
Data[n]
SPIOVF
[4]
Data[n]
[2]
Data[n+2]
[3]
[1] When Data[n] is received, the SPIF will be set.
[2] If SPIF is not clear before Data[n+1] progress done, the SPIOVF will
be set. Data[n] will be kept in read data buffer but Data [n+1] will be lost.
[3] SPIF and SPIOVF must be cleared by software.
[4] When Data[n+2] is received, the SPIF will be set again.
Figure 13-7 SPI Overrun Waveform
13.10 SPI Interrupts
Three SPI status flags, SPIF, MODF, and SPIOVF, can generate an SPI event interrupt requests. All
of them locate in SPSR. SPIF will be set after completion of data transfer with external device or a
new data have been received and copied to SPDR. MODF becomes set to indicate a low level on SS
causing the Mode Fault state. SPIOVF denotes a receiving overrun error. If SPI interrupt mask is
enabled via setting ESPI (EIE.6) and EA is 1, CPU will executes the SPI interrupt service routine once
any of the three flags is set. The user needs to check flags to determine what event caused the
interrupt. The three flags are software cleared.
SPIF
SPIOVF
SS
MSTR
DISMODF
Mode
MODF
Fault
ESPI
Detection
(EIE.6)
SPI Interrupt
Request
EA
Figure 13-8 SPI Interrupt Request
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 83 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
ORG
LJMP
0000H
START
ORG
LJMP
004BH
SPI_ISR
ORG
SPI_ISR:
ANL
reti
0100H
SPSR,#7FH
START:
ANL
ANL
ORL
ORL
ANL
SETB
SETB
ORL
SPCR,#0DFH
SPCR,#0F7H
SPCR,#04H
SPCR,#10H
SPCR,#0FCH
ESPI
EA
SPCR,#40H
;MSB first
;The SPI clock is low in idle mode
;The data is sample on the second edge of SPI clock
;SPI in Master mode
;SPI clock = Fosc/16
;Enable SPI interrupt
MOV
ORL
SPDR,#90H
PCON,#01H
;Send 0x90 to Slave
;Enter idle mode
SJMP
END
$
Jan. 6, 2016
;Enable SPI function
Page 84 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
14 Keyboard Interrupt (KBI)
The N79E715 provides the 8 keyboard interrupt function to detect keypad status which key is acted,
and allow a single interrupt to be generated when any key is pressed on a keyboard or keypad
connected to specific pins of the N79E715, as shown in the following figure. This interrupt may be
used to wake up the CPU from Idle or Power-down mode, after chip is in Power-down or Idle mode.
Keyboard function is supported through by Port 0. It can allow any or all pins of Port 0 to be enabled to
cause this interrupt. Port pins are enabled by the setting of bits of KBI0 ~ KBI7 in the KBI register, as
shown in the following figure. The Keyboard Interrupt Flag, KBIF[7:0] in the KBIF(EAH), is set when
any enabled pin is triggered while the KBI interrupt function is active, an interrupt will be generated if it
has been enabled. The KBIF[7:0] bit is set by hardware and should be cleared by software. To
determine which key was pressed, the KBI will allow the interrupt service routine to poll port 0.
KBI supports four triggered conditions － low level, falling edge, rising edge and either rising or falling
edge detection. The triggered condition of each port pin is individually controlled by two bits
KBLS1(ECH).x and KBLS0(EBH).x where x is 0 to 7. After Trigger occurs and two machines pass,
KBIF assert.
KBI is generally used to detect an edge transient from peripheral devices like keyboard or keypad.
During idle state, the system prefers to enter Power-down mode to minimize power consumption and
waits for event trigger. The N79E715 supports KBI interrupt waking up MCU from Power down. Note
that if KBI is selected as any of edge trigger mode, restrictions should be followed to make Power
Down woken up valid. For a falling edge waking up, pin state should be high at the moment of entering
Power-down mode. Respectively, pin state should be low for a rising edge waking up.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 85 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
P0.7
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.7
KBI.7
P0.6
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.6
KBI.6
P0.5
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.5
KBI.5
P0.4
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.4
KBI Interrupt
Request
KBI.4
P0.3
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.3
EIE.EKB
KBI.3
P0.2
Low-level/
edge detect
[KBIS1.x, KBIS0.x]
KBIF.2
[00]
KBI.2
P0.1
Low-level/
edge detect
KBIF.1
KBI.1
P0.0
Low-level/
edge detect
KBI.0
[01]
P0.x
KBIF.0
or
X=0~7
Lowlevel
[10]
[11]
KBI Low-leve/Edge detect selection
Figure 14-1 Keyboard Interrupt Detection
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 86 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 14–1 Configuration for Different KBI Level Selection
KBLS1.n
KBLS0.n
KBI Channel n Type
0
0
Falling edge
0
1
Rising edge
1
0
Either falling or rising edge
1
1
Low level
KBIE – Keyboard Interrupt Enable Register
7
6
5
4
KBIE.7
KBIE.6
KBIE.5
KBIE.4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: E9H
Bit
Name
7:0
KBIE
3
KBIE.3
R/W
2
KBIE.3
R/W
1
0
KBIE.1
KBIE.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Keyboard Interrupt
Enable P0[7:0] as a cause of a Keyboard interrupt.
KBIF – Keyboard Interface Flags
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KBIF[7:0]
R (level)
R/W (edge)
Address: EAH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
KBIFn
Keyboard Interface Channel n Flag
If any edge trigger mode of KBI is selected, this flag will be set by hardware if KBI
channel n (P0.n) detects a type defined edge. This flag should be cleared by
software.
If the low level trigger mode of KBI is selected, this flag follows the inverse of the
input signal’s logic level on KBI channel n (P0.n)l. Software cannot control it.
KBLS0 – Keyboard Level Select 0[1]
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KBLS0[7:0]
R/W
Address: EBH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
KBLS0[7:0]
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Keyboard Level Select 0
Page 87 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
KBLS1 – Keyboard Level Select 1[1]
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KBLS1[7:0]
R/W
Address: ECH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
KBLS1[7:0]
Description
Keyboard Level Select 1
[1] KBLS1 and KBLS0 are used in combination to determine the input type of each channel of KBI (on P0). Refer to
Table 14–1 Configuration for Different KBI Level Select.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 88 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
15 Analog-To-Digital Converter (ADC)
The ADC contains a DAC which converts the contents of a successive approximation register to a
voltage (VDAC) which is compared to the analog input voltage (Vin). The output of the comparator is
fed to the successive approximation control logic which controls the successive approximation
register. A conversion is initiated by setting ADCS in the ADCCON0 register. ADCS can be set by
software only or by either hardware or software. Note that when the ADC function is disabled, all ADC
related SFR bits will be unavailable and will not affect any other CPU functions. The power of ADC
block is approached to zero.
The software only start mode is selected when control bit ADCCON0.5 (ADCEX) =0. A conversion is
then started by setting control bit ADCCON0.3 (ADCS) The hardware or software start mode is
selected when ADCCON0.5 (ADCEX) =1, and a conversion may be started by setting ADCCON0.3 as
above or by applying a rising edge to external pin STADC. When a conversion is started by applying a
rising edge, a low level should be applied to STADC for at least one machine-cycle followed by a high
level for at least one machine-cycle.
The low-to-high transition of STADC is recognized at the end of a machine-cycle, and the conversion
commences at the beginning of the next cycle. When a conversion is initiated by software, the
conversion starts at the beginning of the machine-cycle which follows the instruction that sets ADCS.
ADCS is actually implemented with tpw flip-flops: a command flip-flop which is affected by set
operations, and a status flag which is accessed during read operations.
The next two machine-cycles are used to initiate the converter. At the end of the first cycle, the ADCS
status flag is set end a value of “1” will be returned if the ADCS flag is read while the conversion is in
progress. Sampling of the analog input commences at the end of the second cycle.
During the next eight machine-cycles, the voltage at the previously selected pin of port 0 is sampled,
and this input voltage should be stable to obtain a useful sample. In any event, the input voltage slew
rate should be less than 10V/ms to prevent an undefined result.
The successive approximation control logic first sets the most significant bit and clears all other bits in
the successive approximation register (10 0000 0000b). The output of the DAC (50% full scale) is
compared to the input voltage Vin. If the input voltage is greater than V DAC, the bit remains set;
otherwise it is cleared.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 89 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
The successive approximation control logic now sets the next most significant bit (11 0000 0000b or
01 0000 0000b, depending on the previous result), and the V DAC is compared to Vin again. If the input
voltage is greater than VDAC, the bit remains set; otherwise it is cleared. This process is repeated until
all ten bits have been tested, at which stage the result of the conversion is held in the successive
approximation register. The conversion takes four machine-cycles per bit.
The end of the 10-bit conversion is flagged by control bit ADCCON0.4 (ADCI). The upper 8 bits of the
result are held in special function register ADCH, and the two remaining bits are held in ADCCON0.7
(ADC.1) and ADCCON0.6 (ADC.0). The user may ignore the two least significant bits in ADCCON0
and use the ADC as an 8-bit converter (8 upper bits in ADCH). In any event, the total actual
conversion time is 35 machine-cycles. ADC will be set and the ADCS status flag will be reset 35
cycles after the ADCS is set.
Control bits ADCCON0.0 ~ ADCCON0.2 are used to control an analog multiplexer which selects one
of 8 analog channels. An ADC conversion in progress is unaffected by an external or software ADC
start. The result of a completed conversion remains unaffected provided ADCI = logic 1; a new ADC
conversion already in progress is aborted when entering Idle or Power-down mode. The result of a
completed conversion (ADCI = logic 1) remains unaffected when entering Idle mode.
When ADCCON0.5 (ADCEX) is set by external pin to start ADC conversion, after the N79E715 enters
Idle mode, P1.4 can start ADC conversion at least ONE machine-cycle.
MSB
DAC
Successive
Approximation
Register
Successive
Approximation
Control Logic
LSB
VDAC
Vin
Start
Ready
(Stop)
Comparator
+
Figure 15-1 Successive Approximation ADC
The ADC circuit has its own supply pins (AVDD and AVSS) and one pins (Vref+) connected to each end
of the DAC’s resistance-ladder that the AVDD and Vref+ are connected to VDD and AVSS is connected
to VSS. The ladder has 1023 equally spaced taps, separated by a resistance of “R”. The first tap is
located 0.5×R above AVSS, and the last tap is located 0.5×R below Vref+. This gives a total ladder
resistance of 1024×R. This structure ensures that the DAC is monotonic and results in a symmetrical
quantization error.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 90 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
For input voltages between AVSS and [(Vref+) + ½ LSB], the 10-bit result of an A/D conversion will be
0000000000B = 000H. For input voltages between [(Vref+) – 3/2 LSB] and Vref+, the result of a
conversion will be 1111111111B = 3FFH. Avref+ and AVSS may be between AVDD + 0.2V and AVSS –
0.2 V. Avref+ should be positive with respect to AVSS, and the input voltage (Vin) should be between
Avref+ and AVSS.
The result can always be calculated according to the following formula:
Vin
Result = 1024
VDD
VDD
ADC Conversion Block
ADC0(P0.1)
0
Band-gap(1.3V)
1
ADC1(P0.2)
ADC2(P0.3)
ADC3(P0.4)
ADC4(P0.5)
ADC5(P0.6)
ADC6(P0.7)
ADC7(P2.6)
ADC0SEL(ADCCON1.0)
Analog
Input
Multiplexer
Vref
AVDD
ADC.[9:0]
AADR[2:0]
ADCCON0[2:0]
ADCS[1]
(ADCCON0.3)
0
10-bits
ADC Block
ADCS[2]
1
P1.4
ADCEX
(ADCCON0.5)
FSYS/4
RC22MHz/4
or RC11MHz/2
ADCI[3]
(ADCCON0.4)
ADCEN
(ADCCON1.7)
CPU clk
RC osc
0
ADCCLK
AVSS
1
RCCLK(ADCCON1.1)
VSS
Note: [1]. Write to ADCS to start ADC convertion
[2]. Read from ADCS to monitor ADC convertion finished or not.
[3]. Read from ADCI to monitor ADC convertion finished or not.
Figure 15-2 ADC Block Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 91 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
ADCCON0 – ADC Control Register 0
7
6
5
ADC.1
ADC.0
ADCEX
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: F8H
4
ADCI
R/W
3
ADCS
R/W
2
AADR2
R/W
1
0
AADR1
AADR0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
Description
7
ADC.1
ADC conversion result.
6
ADC.0
ADC conversion result.
5
ADCEX
0 = Disable external start of conversion by P1.4.
1 = Enable external start of conversion by P1.4. The STADC signal at least 1
machine-cycle.
4
ADCI
0 = The ADC is not busy.
1 = The ADC conversion result is ready to be read. An interrupt is invoked if it is
enabled. It can
not set by software.
3
ADCS
ADC Start and Status: Set this bit to start an A/D conversion. It may also be set
by STADC if ADCEX is 1. This signal remains high while the ADC is busy and
is reset right after ADCI is set.
Notes:
It is recommended to clear ADCI before ADCS is set. However, if ADCI is
cleared and ADCS is set at the same time, a new A/D conversion may start on
the same channel.
Software clearing of ADCS will abort conversion in progress.
ADC cannot start a new conversion while ADCS or ADCI is high.
2
AADR2
ADC input select.
1
AADR1
ADC input select.
0
AADR0
ADC input select.
ADCI
ADCS
ADC Status
0
0
ADC not busy; A conversion can be started.
0
1
ADC busy; Start of a new conversion is blocked
1
0
Conversion completed; the start of a new conversion requires ADCI = 0
1
1
Conversion completed; the start of a new conversion requires ADCI = 0
If ADC is cleared by software while ADCS is set at the same time, a new A/D conversion with the
same channel number may be started. However, it is recommended to reset ADCI before ADCS is
set.
ADDR2, AADR1, AADR0: ADC Analog Input Channel select bits:
These bits can only be changed when ADCI and ADCS are both zero.
AADR2
AADR1
AADR0
Selected Analog Channel
0
0
0
ADC0 (P0.1)
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 92 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
0
0
1
ADC1 (P0.2)
0
1
0
ADC2 (P0.3)
0
1
1
ADC3 (P0.4)
1
0
0
ADC4 (P0.5)
1
0
1
ADC5 (P0.6)
1
1
0
ADC6 (P0.7)
1
1
1
ADC7 (P2.6)
ADCH – ADC Converter Result Register
7
6
5
ADC.9
ADC.8
ADC.7
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: E2H
4
ADC.6
R/W
3
ADC.5
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
ADCH
ADC conversion result bits [9:2]
ADCCON1 – ADC Control Register
7
6
5
ADCEN
R/W
Address: E1H
4
-
Bit
Name
Description
7
ADCEN
0 = Disable ADC circuit.
1 = Enable ADC circuit.
6:2
-
1
RCCLK
0
ADC0SEL
R/W
Bit
Name
7:0
P0DIDS.x
1
0
ADC.3
ADC.2
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
2
-
1
0
RCCLK
ADC0SEL
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Reserved
0 = The FSYS/4 clock is used as ADC clock.
1 = The FHIRC /2 clock is used as ADC clock.
0 = Select ADC channel 0 as input.
1 = Select Band-gap (~1.3V) as input.
P0DIDS – Port0 Digital Input Disable
7
6
5
R/W
Address: F6H
3
-
2
ADC.4
R/W
R/W
4
3
P0DIDS[7:0]
R/W
R/W
2
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
1 = Disable digital function for each Port0.
0 = Enable digital function for each Port0.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 93 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
AUXR1 – AUX Function Resgister-1
7
6
5
SPI_Sel
UART_Sel
R/W
R/W
Address: A2H
Bit
Name
3
DisP26
4
-
3
DisP26
R/W
2
-
1
0
0
DPS
R
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Enable P2.6 digital input and output.
1 = Disable P2.6 digital input and output for ADC channel 7 used.
The demo code of ADC channel 0 with clock source = Fsys/4 is as follows:
ORG
LJMP
0000H
START
ORG
CLR
reti
005BH
ADCI
;ADC Interrupt Service Routine
;Clear ADC flag
P0DIDS,#02H
P0M1,#02H
P0M2,#0FDH
ADCCON0,#0F8H
ADCCON1,#0FDH
EADC
EA
ADCCON1,#80H
; Disable digital function for P0.1
; ADC0(P0.1) is input-only mode
START:
ORL
ORL
ANL
ANL
ANL
SETB
SETB
ORL
Convert_LOOP:
SETB
ADCS
ORL
PCON,#01H
MOV
P0,ADCH
MOV
P1,ADCL
SJMP
Convert_LOOP
;ADC0(P0.1) as ADC Channel
;The FSYS/4 clock is used as ADC clock.
;Enable ADC Interrupt
;Enable ADC Function
;Trigger ADC
;Enter idle mode
;Converted Data put in P0 and P1
END
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 94 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
16
16.1 Features
2
The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I C) bus serves as a serial interface between the microcontroller and the
2
2
I C devices such as EEPROM, LCD module, and so on. The I C bus used two wires design (a serial
data line SDA and a serial clock line SCL) to transfer information between devices.
2
The I C bus uses bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves. There is no central master
and the multi-master system is allowed by arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters.
The serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via one serial
2
bus. The I C bus supports four transfer modes including master transmitter mode, master receiver
2
mode, slave receiver mode, and slave transmitter mode. The I C interface only supports 7-bit
2
addressing mode and General Call can be accepted. The I C can meet both standard (up to 100kbps)
and fast (up to 400kbps) speeds.
16.2 Functional Description
For the bidirectional transfer operation, the SDA and SCL pins should be connected to open-drain
pads. This implements a wired-AND function which is essential to the operation of the interface. A low
2
2
level on a I C bus line is generated when one or more I C devices output a “0”. A high level is
2
generated when all I C devices output “1”, allowing the pull-up resistors to pull the line high.
2
In N79E715, the user should set output latches of P1.2 and P1.3. as logic 1 before enabling the I C
function by setting I2CEN (I2CON.6). The P1.2 and P1.3 are configured as the open-drain I/O once
2
the I C function is enabled. The P1M2 and P1M1 will also be re-configured. It is strongly
recommended that the Schmitt trigger input buffer be enabled by setting P1S for improved glitch
suppression.
Vdd
RUP
RUP
SDA
SCL
SDA
SCL
N79E715
Jan. 6, 2016
SDA
SCL
Other MCU
Page 95 of 189
SDA
SCL
Slave Device
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
2
Figure 16-1 I C Bus Interconnection
2
The I C is considered free when both lines are high. Meanwhile, any device which can operate as a
master can occupy the bus and generate one transfer after generating a START condition. The bus
now is considered busy before the transfer ends by sending a STOP condition. The master generates
all of the serial clock pulses and the START and STOP condition. However if there is no START
condition on the bus, all devices serve as not addressed slave. The hardware looks for its own slave
address or a General Call address. (The General Call address detection may be enabled or disabled
by GC (I2ADDR.0).) If the matched address is received, an interrupt is requested.
2
Every transaction on the I C bus is 9 bits long, consisting of 8 data bits (MSB first) and a single
acknowledge bit. The number of bytes per transfer (defined as the time between a valid START and
STOP condition) is unrestricted but each byte has to be followed by an acknowledge bit. The master
th
device generates 8 clock pulse to send the 8-bit data. After the 8 falling edge of the SCL line, the
device outputting data on the SDA changes that pin to an input and reads in an acknowledge value on
th
th
the 9 clock pulse. After 9 clock pulse, the data receiving device can hold SCL line stretched low if
next receiving is not prepared ready. It forces the next byte transaction suspended. The data
transaction continues when the receiver releases the SCL line.
SDA
MSB
LSB
ACK
8
9
SCL
1
2
START
condition
STOP
condition
2
Figure 16-2 I C Bus Protocol
16.2.1
START and STOP Conditions
2
The protocol of the I C bus defines two states to begin and end a transfer, START (S) and STOP (P)
conditions. A START condition is defined as a high-to-low transition on the SDA line while SCL line is
high. The STOP condition is defined as a low-to-high transition on the SDA line while SCL line is high.
2
A START or a STOP condition is always generated by the master and I C bus is considered busy after
a START condition and free after a STOP condition. After issuing the STOP condition successful, the
original master device will release the control authority and turn back as a not addressed slave.
2
Consequently, the original addressed slave will become a not addressed slave. The I C bus is free
and listens to next START condition of next transfer.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 96 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
A data transfer is always terminated by a STOP condition generated by the master. However, if a
master still wishes to communicate on the bus, it can generate a repeated START (Sr) condition and
address the pervious or another slave without first generating a STOP condition. Various combinations
of read/write formats are then possible within such a transfer.
SDA
SCL
START
STOP
Repeated
START
START
STOP
Figure 16-3 START, Repeated START, and STOP Conditions
16.2.2
7-bit Address with Data Format
Following the START condition is generated, one byte of special data should be transmitted by the
th
master. It includes a 7-bit long slave address (SLA) following by an 8 bit, which is a data direction bit
(R/W), to address the target slave device and determine the direction of data flow. If R/W bit is 0, it
indicates that the master will write information to a selected slave, and if this bit is 1, it indicates that
the master will read information from the slave. An address packet consisting of a slave address and a
read (R) or a write (W) bit is called SLA+R or SLA+W, respectively. A transmission basically consists
of a START condition, a SLA+R/W, one or more data packets and a STOP condition. After the
specified slave is addressed by SLA+R/W, the second and following 8-bit data bytes issue by the
master or the slave devices according to the R/W bit configuration.
There is an exception called “General Call” address which can address all devices by giving the first
byte of data all 0. A General Call is used when a master wishes to transmit the same message to
several slaves in the system. When this address is used, other devices may respond with an
acknowledge or ignore it according to individual software configuration. If a device response the
General
Jan. 6, 2016
Call,
it
operates
like
in
Page 97 of 189
the
Slave-receiver
mode.
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
SDA
SCL
S
1-7
8
9
ADDRESS
W/R
ACK
1-7
8
DATA
9
ACK
1-7
8
DATA
9
ACK
P
2
Figure 16-4 Data Format of I C Transfer
During the data transaction period, the data on the SDA line should be stable during the high period of
the clock, and the data line can only change when SCL is low.
16.2.3
Acknowledge
th
The 9 SCL pulse for any transferred byte is dedicated as an Acknowledge (ACK). It allows receiving
devices (which can be the master or slave) to respond back to the transmitter (which can also be the
master or slave) by pulling the SDA line low. The acknowledge-related clock pulse is generated by the
master. The transmitter should release control of SDA line during the acknowledge clock pulse. The
ACK is an active-low signal, pulling the SDA line low during the clock pulse high duty, indicates to the
transmitter that the device has received the transmitted data. Commonly, a receiver which has been
addressed is requested to generate an ACK after each byte has been received. When a slave receiver
does not acknowledge (NACK) the slave address, the SDA line should be left high by the slave so that
the mater can generate a STOP or a repeated START condition.
If a slave-receiver does acknowledge the slave address, it switches itself to not addressed slave mode
and cannot receive any more data bytes. This slave leaves the SDA line high. The master should
generate a STOP or a repeated START condition.
If a master-receiver is involved in a transfer, because the master controls the number of bytes in the
transfer, it should signal the end of data to the slave-transmitter by not generating an acknowledge on
the last byte. The slave-transmitter then switches to not addressed mode and release the SDA line to
allow the master to generate a STOP or a repeated START condition.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 98 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
SDA output by transmitter
SDA output by receiver
SDA = 0, acknowledge (ACK)
SDA = 1, not acknowledge (NACK)
SCL from master
1
2
8
9
Clock pulse for
acknowledge bit
START
condition
Figure 16-5 Acknowledge Bit
16.2.4
Arbitration
A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. It is possible for two or more masters to generate
a START condition. In these situations, an arbitration scheme takes place on the SDA line, while SCL
is high. During arbitration, the first of the competing master devices to place a '1' (high) on SDA while
another master transmits a '0' (low) switches off its data output stage because the level on the bus
does not match its own level. The arbitration lost master switches to the not addressed slave
immediately to detect its own slave address in the same serial transfer whether it is being addressed
by the winning master. It also releases SDA line to high level for not affecting the data transfer initiated
by the winning master. However, the arbitration lost master continues SCL line to generate the clock
pulses until the end of the byte in which it loses the arbitration. If the address matches the losing
master’s own slave address, it switches to the addressed-slave mode.
Arbitration is carried out by all masters continuously monitoring the SDA line after outputting data. If
the value read from the SDA line does not match the value the master had output, it has lost the
arbitration. Note that a master can only lose arbitration when it outputs a high SDA value while another
master outputs a low value. Arbitration will continue until only one master remains, and this may take
many bits. If several masters are trying to address the same slave, arbitration will continue into the
data packet.
Arbitration can take place over several bits. Its first stage is a comparison of address bits, and if both
masters are trying to address the same device, arbitration continues on to the comparison of data bits
or acknowledge bit.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 99 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
DATA 1 from master 1
Master 1 loses arbitration for DATA 1 ≠ SDA
It immediately switches to not addressed slave
and outputs high level
DATA 2 from master 2
SDA line
SCL line
START
condition
Figure 16-6 Arbitration Procedure of Two Masters
2
Since the control of I C bus is decided solely by the address or master code and data sent by
competing masters, there is no central master, nor any order of priority on the bus.
Slaves are not involved in the arbitration procedure.
16.3 Control Registers of I2C
2
There are five control registers to interface the I C bus. They are I2CON, I2STA, I2DAT, I2ADDR,
I2CLK, and I2TMR. These registers provide protocol control, status, data transmit and receive
2
functions, clock rate configuration, and timeout notification. The following registers relate to I C
function.
2
I2CON – I C Control
7
6
I2CEN
R/W
Address: C0H
Bit
Name
7
-
6
I2CEN
Jan. 6, 2016
5
STA
R/W
4
STO
R/W
3
SI
R/W
2
AA
R/W
1
0
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
2
I C Bus Enable
2
0 = I C bus is disabled.
2
1 = I C bus is enabled.
2
Before enabling the I C, Px.x and Px.x port latches should be set to logic 1. Once
2
the I C bus is enabled, SDA pin (Px.x) and SCL pin (Px.x) will be automatically
switched to the open-drain mode. PxM2 and PxM1 registers will also be reconfigured accordingly.
Page 100 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
5
STA
START Flag
2
When STA is set, the I C generates a START condition if the bus is free. If the bus
2
is busy, the I C waits for a STOP condition and generates a START condition
following.
2
If STA is set while the I C is already in Master mode and one or more bytes have
2
been transmitted or received, the I C generates a repeated START condition.
Note that STA can be set anytime even in a slave mode, but STA is not hardware
automatically cleared after START or repeated START condition has been
detected. The user should take care of it by clearing STA manually.
4
STO
STOP Flag
2
When STO is set if the I C is in Master mode, a STOP condition is transmitted to
the bus. STO is automatically cleared by hardware once the STOP condition has
been detected on the bus.
2
The STO flag setting is also used to recover the I C device from the bus error state
2
(I2STA as 00H). In this case, no STOP condition is transmitted to the I C bus.
If the STA and STO bits are both set and the device is original in Master mode, the
2
I C bus will generate a STOP condition and immediately follow a START condition.
If the device is in slave mode, STA and STO simultaneous setting should be avoid
2
from issuing illegal I C frames.
3
SI
Serial Interrupt Flag
2
The SI flag is set by hardware when one of 25 possible I C status (besides F8H
status) is entered. After SI is set, the software should read I2STA register to
determine which step has been passed and take actions for next step.
SI is cleared by software. Before the SI is cleared, the low period of SCL line is
stretched. The transaction is suspended. It is useful for the slave device to deal
with previous data bytes until ready for receiving the next byte.
The serial transaction is suspended until SI is cleared by software. After SI is
2
cleared, I C bus will continue to generate START or repeated START condition,
STOP condition, 8-bit data, or so on depending on the software configuration of
controlling byte or bits. Therefore the user should take care of it by preparing
suitable setting of registers before SI is software cleared.
2
AA
Acknowledge Assert Flag
If the AA flag is set, an ACK (low level on SDA) will be returned during the
2
acknowledge clock pulse of the SCL line while the I C device is a receiver which
can be a master, an addressed slave, an own-address-matching slave, or a
Genera-Call acceptable slave.
If the AA flag is cleared, a NACK (high level on SDA) will be returned during the
2
acknowledge clock pulse of the SCL line while the I C device is a receiver which
can be a master, an addressed slave. A device with its own AA flag cleared will
ignore its own salve address and the General Call. Consequently, SI will note be
asserted and no interrupt is requested.
Note that if an addressed slave does not return an ACK under slave receiver mode
or not receive an ACK under slave transmitter mode, the slave device will become
a not addressed slave. It cannot receive any data until its AA flag is set and a
master addresses it again.
There is a special case of I2STA value C8H occurs under slave transmitter mode.
Before the slave device transmit the last data byte to the master, AA flag can be
cleared as 0. Then after the last data byte transmitted, the slave device will actively
switch to not addressed slave mode of disconnecting with the master. The further
reading of the master will be all FFH.
1:0
-
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Reserved
Page 101 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
2
I2STA – I C Status
7
6
5
I2STA[7:3]
R
4
3
2
0
R
Address: BDH
Bit
Name
7:3
I2STA[7:3]
2:0
-
1
0
0
0
R
R
Reset value: 1111 1000B
Description
2
I C Status Code
The most five bits of I2STA contains the status code. There are 26 possible
status codes. When I2STA is F8H, no relevant state information is available and
2
SI flag keeps 0. All other 25 status codes correspond to the I C states. When
each of the status is entered, SI will be set as logic 1 and a interrupt is requested.
Reserved
The least three bits of I2STA are always read as 0.
2
I2DAT – I C Data
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I2DAT[7:0]
R/W
Address: BCH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
I2DAT[7:0]
Description
2
I C Data
2
I2DAT contains a byte of the I C data is going to transmit or a byte has just
received. Data in I2DAT remains as long as SI is logic 1. The result of reading or
2
writing I2DAT during I C transmit progress is unpredicted.
While data in I2DAT shift out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted into
2
update I2DAT. I2DAT always shows the last byte that presented on the I C bus.
Thus the event of lost arbitration, the original value of I2DAT changes after the
transaction.
2
I2ADDR – I C Own Slave Address
7
6
5
4
I2ADDR[7:1]
R/W
3
Address: C1H
Bit
7:1
Name
2
1
0
GC
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
2
I2ADDR[7:1] I C device’s own Slave Address
In Master mode:
These bits have no effect.
In Slave mode:
2
The 7 bits define the slave address of this I C device by the user. The master
2
should address this I C device by sending the same address in the first byte data
2
after a START or a repeated START condition. If the AA flag is set, this I C device
will acknowledge the master after receiving its own address and become an
addressed slave. Otherwise, the addressing from the master will be ignored.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 102 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
0
GC
Description
General Call Bit
In Master mode:
This bit has no effect.
In Slave mode:
0 = General Call is always ignored.
1 = General Call is recognized if AA flag is 1; otherwise, it is ignored if AA is 0.
2
I2CLK – I C Clock
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I2CLK[7:0]
R/W
Address: BEH
Bit
7:0
Reset value: 0000 1110B
Name
Description
2
I2CLK[7:0] I C Clock Setting
In Master mode:
2
This register determines the clock rate of I C bus when the device is in Master
mode. The clock rate follows the formula below.
FI2C
FSYS
4 (I2CLK 1)
2
The default value will make the clock rate of I C bus 400kbps if the clock system 24
MHz with DIVM 1/4 mode is used.
Note that the I2CLK value of 00H and 01H are not valid. This is an implement
limitation.
In Slave mode:
2
This byte has no effect. In slave mode, the I C device will automatically
synchronize with any given clock rate up to 400kps.
16.4 Operation Modes
2
In I C protocol definitions, there are four operating modes including master transmitter, master
receiver, slave receive, and slave transmitter. There is also a special mode called General Call. Its
operation is similar to master transmitter mode.
16.4.1
Master Transmitter Mode
In Master Transmitter mode, several bytes of data are transmitted to a slave receiver. The master
2
should prepare by setting desired clock rate in I2CLK and enabling I C bus by writing I2CEN
(I2CON.6) as logic 1. The master transmitter mode may now be entered by setting STA (I2CON.5) bit
as 1. The hardware will test the bus and generate a START condition as soon as the bus becomes
free. After a START condition is successfully produced, the SI flag (I2CON.3) will be set and the status
code in I2STA show 08H. The progress is continued by loading I2DAT with the target slave address
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 103 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
and the data direction bit “write” (SLA+W). The SI bit should then be cleared to commence SLA+W
transaction.
After the SLA+W byte has been transmitted and an acknowledge (ACK) has been returned by the
addressed slave device, the SI flag is set again and I2STA is read as 18H. The appropriate action to
be taken follows the user defined communication protocol by sending data continuously. After all data
is transmitted, the master can send a STOP condition by setting STO (I2CON.4) and then clearing SI
to terminate the transmission. A repeated START condition can also be generated without sending
STOP condition to immediately initial another transmission.
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (1,0,0,X)
A START will be transmitted
08H
A START has been transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (X,0,0,X)
I2DAT = SLA+W
SLA+W will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (X,0,0,1)
I2DAT = SLA+W
SLA+W will be transmitted
MT
68H
18H
78H
or
Arbitration lost and addressed
as slave receiver
ACK has been transmitted
OR
SLA+W has been transmitted
ACK has been received
OR
20H
B0H
SLA+W has been transmitted
NACK has been received
Arbitration lost and addressed
as slave transmitter
ACK has been transmitted
to corresponding
slave mode
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,X)
A repeated START will be
transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,1,0,X)
A STOP will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,1,0,X)
A STOP followed by a
START will be transmitted
28H
10H
Data byte has been transmitted
ACK has been received
or
A repeated START has
been transmitted
A STOP has been
transmitted
A STOP has been
transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,X)
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte will be transmitted
30H
Data byte has been transmitted
NACK has been received
38H
Arbitration lost in
SLA+W or Data byte
(STA,STO,SI,AA) =(0,0,0,X)
I2DAT = SLA+R
SLA+R will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,X)
Not addressed slave
will be entered
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,X)
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
MR
to master receiver
Figure 16-7 Flow and Status of Master Transmitter Mode
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 104 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
16.4.2
Master Receiver Mode
In Master Receiver mode, several bytes of data are received from a slave transmitter. The transaction
is initialized just as the master transmitter mode. Following the START condition, I2DAT should be
loaded with the target slave address and the data direction bit “read” (SLA+R). After the SLA+R byte is
transmitted and an acknowledge bit has been returned, the SI flag is set again and I2STA is read as
40H. SI flag should then be cleared to receive data from the slave transmitter. If AA flag (I2CON.3) is
set, the master receiver will acknowledge the slave transmitter. If AA is cleared, the master receiver
will not acknowledge the slave and release the slave transmitter as a not addressed slave. After that,
the master can generate a STOP condition or a repeated START condition to terminate the
transmission or initial another one.
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (1,0,0,X)
A START will be transmitted
08H
A START has been transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (X,0,0,X)
I2DAT = SLA+R
SLA+R will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (X,0,0,1)
I2DAT = SLA+R
SLA+R will be transmitted
40H
or
Arbitration lost and addressed
as slave receiver
ACK has been transmitted
OR
MR
68H
SLA+R has been transmitted
ACK has been received
OR
48H
78H
B0H
SLA+R has been transmitted
NACK has been received
Arbitration lost and addressed
as slave transmitter
ACK has been transmitted
to corresponding
slave mode
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,0)
Data byte will be received
NACK will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,1)
Data byte will be received
ACK will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,X)
A repeated START will be
transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,1,0,X)
A STOP will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,1,0,X)
A STOP followed by a
START will be transmitted
A STOP has been
transmitted
A STOP has been
transmitted
58H
50H
10H
Data byte has been received
NACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
A repeated START has
been transmitted
38H
Arbitration lost in
SLA+W or NACK bit
(STA,STO,SI,AA) =(0,0,0,X)
I2DAT = SLA+W
SLA+W will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,X)
Not addressed slave
will be entered
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,X)
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
MT
to master transmitter
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 105 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 16-8 Flow and Status of Master Receiver Mode
16.4.3
Slave Receiver Mode
In Slave Receiver mode, several bytes of data are received form a master transmitter. Before a
transmission is commenced, I2ADDR should be loaded with the address to which the device will
respond when addressed by a master. I2CLK does not affect in slave mode. The AA bit should be set
2
to enable acknowledging its own slave address or General Call. After the initialization above, the I C
wait until it is addressed by its own address with the data direction bit “write” (SLA+W) or by General
Call addressing. The slave receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost.
After the slave is addressed by SLA+W, it should clear its SI flag to receive the data from the master
transmitter. If the AA bit is 0 during a transaction, the slave will return a non-acknowledge after the
next received data byte. The slave will also become not addressed and isolate with the master. It
cannot receive any byte of data with I2DAT remaining the previous byte of data which is just received.
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (0,0,0,1)
If own SLA+W is received,
ACK will be transmitted
60H
Own SLA+W has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = own SLA+W
OR
68H
Arbitration lost and own SLA+W
has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = own SLA+W
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,1)
Data byte will be received
ACK will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,0)
Data byte will be received
NACK will be transmitted
80H
88H
Data byte has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte has been received
NACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
A0H
A STOP or repeated
START has been received
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave
will be entered; no recognition
of own SLA or General Call
Jan. 6, 2016
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; no recognition of own
SLA or General Call;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
Page 106 of 189
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 16-9 Flow and Status of Slave Receiver Mode
16.4.4
Slave Transmitter Mode
In Slave Transmitter mode, several bytes of data are transmitted to a master receiver. After I2ADDR
2
and I2CON values are given, the I C wait until it is addressed by its own address with the data
direction bit “read” (SLA+R). The slave transmitter mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost.
After the slave is addressed by SLA+W, it should clear its SI flag to transmit the data to the master
transmitter. Normally the master receiver will return an acknowledge after every byte of data is
transmitted by the slave. If the acknowledge is not received, it will transmit all “1” data if it continues
the transaction. It becomes a not addressed slave. If the AA flag is cleared during a transaction, the
slave transmit the last byte of data. The next transmitting data will be all “1” and the slave becomes
not addressed.
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (0,0,0,1)
If own SLA+R is received,
ACK will be transmitted
A8H
Own SLA+R has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = own SLA+R
OR
B0H
Arbitration lost and own SLA+R
has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = own SLA+R
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,1)
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte will be transmitted
ACK will be received
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,X)
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte will be transmitted
NACK will be received
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,0)
I2DAT = Last Data Byte
Data byte will be transmitted
ACK will be received
B8H
C0H
C8H
Data byte has been transmitted
ACK has been received
Data byte has been transmitted
NACK has been received
Last Data byte has been transmitted
ACK has been received
A0H
A STOP or repeated
START has been received
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave
will be entered; no recognition
of own SLA or General Call
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; no recognition of own
SLA or General Call;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
Figure 16-10 Flow and Status of Slave Transmitter Mode
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 107 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
16.4.5
General Call
The General Call is a special condition of slave receiver mode by sending all “0” data in slave address
with data direction bit. The slave addressed by a General Call has different status codes in I2STA with
normal slave receiver mode. The General Call may also be produced if arbitration is lost.
(STA,STO,SI,AA) = (0,0,0,1)
If General Call is received,
ACK will be transmitted
70H
General Call has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = 00H
OR
78H
Arbitration lost and General Call
has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = 00H
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,1)
Data byte will be received
ACK will be transmitted
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(X,0,0,0)
Data byte will be received
NACK will be transmitted
90H
98H
Data byte has been received
ACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
Data byte has been received
NACK has been transmitted
I2DAT = Data Byte
A0H
A STOP or repeated
START has been received
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave
will be entered; no recognition
of own SLA or General Call
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(0,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,0)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; no recognition of own
SLA or General Call;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
(STA,STO,SI,AA)=(1,0,0,1)
Not addressed slave will be
entered; own SLA will be
recognized; General Call will
be recognized if GC = 1;
A START will be transmitted
when the bus becomes free
Figure 16-11 Flow and Status of General Call Mode
16.4.6
Miscellaneous States
There are two I2STA status codes that do not correspond to the 24 defined states, which are
mentioned in previous sections. These are F8H and 00H states.
The first status code F8H indicates that no relevant information is available during each transaction.
2
Meanwhile, the SI flag is 0 and no I C interrupt is required.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 108 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
The other status code 00H means a bus error has occurred during a transaction. A bus error is caused
by a START or STOP condition appearing temporarily at an illegal position such as the second
through eighth bits in an address byte or a data byte including the acknowledge bit. When a bus error
2
occurs, the SI flag is set immediately. When a bus error is detected on the I C bus, the operating
device immediately switches to the not addressed salve mode, release SDA and SCL lines, sets the
SI flag, and loads I2STA 00H. To recover from a bus error, the STO bit should be set as logic 1 and SI
2
should be cleared. After that, STO is cleared by hardware and release the I C bus without issuing a
real STOP condition waveform.
There is a special case if a START or a repeated START condition is not successfully generated for
2
I C bus is obstructed by a low level on SDA line e.g. a slave device out of bit synchronization, the
2
problem can be solved by transmitting additional clock pulses on the SCL line. The I C hardware
transmits additional clock pulses when the STA bit is set, but no START condition can be generated
because the SDA line is pulled low. When the SDA line is eventually released, a normal START
condition is transmitted, state 08H is entered, and the serial transaction continues. If a repeated
2
START condition is transmitted while SDA is obstructed low, the I C hardware also performs the same
action as above. In this case, state 08H is entered instead of 10H after a successful START condition
is transmitted. Note that the software is not involved in solving these bus problems.
2
16.5 Typical Structure of I C Interrupt Service Routine
The following software example in C language for Keil C51 compiler shows the typical structure of the
2
I C interrupt service routine including the 26 state service routines and may be used as a base for user
applications. User can follow or modify it for their own application. If one or more of the five modes are
not used, the associated state service routines may be removed, but care should be taken that a
deleted routine can never be invoked.
void I2C_ISR (void) interrupt 6
{
switch (I2STA)
{
//===============================================
//Bus Error, always put in ISR for noise handling
//===============================================
case 0x00:
/*00H, bus error occurs*/
STO = 1;
//recover from bus error
break;
//===========
//Master Mode
//===========
case 0x08:
/*08H, a START transmitted*/
STA = 0;
//STA bit should be cleared
software
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 109 of 189
by
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
I2DAT = SLA_ADDR1;
break;
case 0x10:
STA = 0;
I2DAT = SLA_ADDR2;
break;
//=======================
//Master Transmitter Mode
//=======================
case 0x18:
//LOAD SLA+W/R
I2DAT = NEXT_SEND_DATA1;
break;
case 0x20:
//LOAD DATA
STO = 1;
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x28:
//transmit STOP
//ready for ACK own SLA+W/R
/*10H, a repeated START transmitted*/
/*18H,
SLA+W
transmitted,
ACK
received*/
/*20H,
SLA+W
transmitted,
NACK
received*/
/*28H,
DATA
transmitted,
ACK
received*/
if (Conti_TX_Data)
//if continuing to send DATA
I2DAT = NEXT_SEND_DATA2;
else
//if no DATA to be sent
{
STO = 1;
AA = 1;
}
break;
case 0x30:
/*30H,
DATA
transmitted,
NACK
received*/
STO = 1;
AA = 1;
break;
//===========
//Master Mode
//===========
case 0x38:
STA = 1;
break;
//====================
//Master Receiver Mode
//====================
case 0x40:
/*38H, arbitration lost*/
//retry to transmit START if bus free
/*40H,
SLA+R
transmitted,
ACK
received*/
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x48:
//ACK next received DATA
/*48H,
SLA+R
transmitted,
NACK
received*/
STO = 1;
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x50:
/*50H,
DATA
received,
ACK
transmitted*/
DATA_RECEIVED1 = I2DAT;
if (To_RX_Last_Data1)
AA = 0;
else
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x58:
//store received DATA
//if last DATA will be received
//not ACK next received DATA
//if continuing receiving DATA
/*58H,
DATA
received,
NACK
transmitted*/
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 110 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
DATA_RECEIVED_LAST1 = I2DAT;
STO = 1;
AA = 1;
break;
//====================================
//Slave Receiver and General Call Mode
//====================================
case 0x60:
/*60H,
own
SLA+W
received,
ACK
returned*/
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x68:
/*68H, arbitration lost in SLA+W/R
own SLA+W received, ACK returned */
//not ACK next received DATA after
//arbitration lost
//retry to transmit START if bus free
AA = 0;
STA = 1;
break;
case 0x70:
//70H,
General
Call
received,
ACK
returned
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x78:
/*78H, arbitration lost in SLA+W/R
General
Call
received,
ACK
returned*/
AA = 0;
STA = 1;
break;
case 0x80:
/*80H,
previous
own
SLA+W,
DATA
own
SLA+W,
DATA
received,
ACK returned*/
DATA_RECEIVED2 = I2DAT;
if (To_RX_Last_Data2)
AA = 0;
else
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x88:
/*88H,
previous
received,
NACK returned, not addressed SLAVE
mode
entered*/
DATA_RECEIVED_LAST2 = I2DAT;
AA = 1;
//wait for ACK next Master addressing
break;
case 0x90:
/*90H, previous General Call, DATA
received,
ACK returned*/
DATA_RECEIVED3 = I2DAT;
if (To_RX_Last_Data3)
AA = 0;
else
AA = 1;
break;
case 0x98:
/*98H,
previous
General
Call,
DATA
received,
NACK returned, not addressed SLAVE
mode
entered*/
DATA_RECEIVED_LAST3 = I2DAT;
AA = 1;
break;
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 111 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
//==========
//Slave Mode
//==========
case 0xA0:
received while
/*A0H,
STOP
or
repeated
START
still addressed SLAVE mode*/
AA = 1;
break;
//======================
//Slave Transmitter Mode
//======================
case 0xA8:
/*A8H,
own
SLA+R
received,
ACK
returned*/
I2DAT = NEXT_SEND_DATA3;
AA = 1;
break;
case 0xB0:
//when AA is “1”, not last data to be
//transmitted
/*B0H, arbitration lost in SLA+W/R
own SLA+R received, ACK returned */
I2DAT = DUMMY_DATA;
AA = 0;
STA = 1;
break;
case 0xB8:
//when AA is “0”, last data to be
//transmitted
//retry to transmit START if bus free
/*B8H,
previous
own
SLA+R,
DATA
transmitted,
ACK received*/
I2DAT = NEXT_SEND_DATA4;
if (To_TX_Last_Data)
//if
last
DATA
will
be
transmitted
AA = 0;
else
AA = 1;
break;
case 0xC0:
/*C0H,
previous
own
SLA+R,
DATA
transmitted,
NACK received, not addressed SLAVE
mode
entered*/
AA = 1;
break;
case 0xC8:
/*C8H, previous own SLA+R, last DATA
transmitted, ACK received, not addressed
SLAVE
mode entered*/
AA = 1;
break;
}//end of switch (I2STA)
SI = 0;
//SI should be the last step of I2C
while(STO);
//wait for
ISR
STOP transmitted or bus
error
//free, STO is cleared by hardware
}//end of I2C_ISR
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 112 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
16.6 I2C Time-out
2
There is a 14-bit time-out counter which can be used to deal with the I C bus hang-up. If the time-out
counter is enabled, the counter starts up counting until it overflows. Meanwhile TIF will be set by
2
hardware and requests I C interrupt. When time-out counter is enabled, setting flag SI to high will
2
reset counter and restart counting up after SI is cleared. If the I C bus hangs up, it causes the SI flag
not set for a period. The 14-bit time-out counter will overflow and require the interrupt service.
0
FSYS
1/4
14-bit I2C Time-out Counter
1
I2TF
Clear Counter
DIV
I2CEN
I2TMREN
SI
2
Figure 16-12 I C Time-out Count
2
I2TOC – I C Time-out Counter
7
6
Address: BFH
Bit
Name
7:3
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
I2TOCEN
R/W
1
0
DIV
I2TOF
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
2
2
I2TOCEN I C Time-out Counter Enable
2
0 = The I C time-out counter is disabled.
2
1 = The I C time-out counter is enabled.
1
DIV
0
I2TOF
2
I C time-out Counter Clock Divider
2
0 = The divider of I C time-out counter is 1/1 of FSYS.
2
1 = The divider of I C time-out counter is 1/4 of FSYS.
2
I C Time-out Counter Overflow Flag
2
I2TOF flag is set by hardware if 14-bit I C time-out counter overflows. I2TOF flag is
cleared by software.
16.7 I2C Interrupts
2
2
There are two I C flags, SI and I2TOF. Both of them can generate an I C event interrupt requests. If
2
2
I C interrupt mask is enabled via setting EI2C (EIE.0) and EA is 1, CPU will executes the I C interrupt
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 113 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
service routine once any of the two flags is set. The user needs to check flags to determine what event
2
caused the interrupt. Both of I C flags are cleared by software.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 114 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
17 Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
17.1 Features
The PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) signal is a useful control solution in wide application field. It can
used on motor driving, fan control, backlight brightness tuning, LED light dimming, or simulating as a
simple digital to analog converter output through a low pass filter circuit. The N79E715 provides four
channels, maximum 10-bit PWM output.
17.2 Functional Description
The N79E715 contains four Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) channels which generate pulses of
programmable length and interval. The output for PWM0 is on P0.1, PWM1 on P1.6, PWM2 on P1.7
and PWM3 on P0.0. After chip reset the internal output of the each PWM channel is a “1”. In this case
before the pin will reflect the state of the internal PWM output a “1” should be written to each port bit
that serves as a PWM output. A block diagram is shown in Figure 17-1. The interval between
successive outputs is controlled by a 10–bit down counter which uses configurable internal clock prescalar as its input. The PWM counter clock has the frequency as the clock source FPWM = FSYS/Prescalar. When the counter reaches underflow it is reloaded with a user selectable value. This
mechanism allows the user to set the PWM frequency at any integer sub–multiple of the
microcontroller clock frequency. The repetition frequency of the PWM is given by:
PWM frequency =
FPWM
PWMn
, PWM active level duty =
.
1+ PWMP
1 + PWMP
where PWMP is contained in PWMPH and PWMPL as described in the following.
PWMPL – PWM Counter Low Bits Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWMP.7
PWMP.6
PWMP.5
PWMP.4
PWMP.3
PWMP.2
PWMP.1
PWMP.0
R/W
Address: D9H
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
3
2
1
0
-
-
PWMP.9
PWMP.8
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
PWMPL
PWM Counter Bits Register bit[7:0]
PWMPH – PWM Counter High Bits Register
7
6
5
4
-
Jan. 6, 2016
-
-
-
Page 115 of 189
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Address: D1H
-
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1:0
PWMPH
-
-
-
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
PWM Counter Bits Register bit[9:8]
The user should follow the initialization steps below to start generating the PWM signal output. In the
first step by setting CLRPWM (PWMCON0.4), it ensures the 10-bit down counter a determined value.
After setting all period and duty registers, PWMRUN (PWMCON0.7) can be set as logic 1 to trigger
the 10-bit down counter running. In the beginning the PWM output remains high until the counter value
is less than the value in duty control registers of PWMnH and PWMnL. At this point the PWM output
goes low until the next underflow. When the 10-bit down counter underflows, PWMP buffer register will
be reloaded in 10-bit down counter. It continues PWM signal output by repeating this routine.
The hardware for all period and duty control registers is double buffered designed. Therefore the
PWMP and PWMn registers can be written to at any time, but the period and duty cycle of PWM will
not updated immediately until the Load (PWMCON0.6) is set and previous period is complete. This
allows updating the PWM period and duty glitch less operation.
PWM0L – PWM 0 Low Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM0.7
PWM0.6
PWM0.5
PWM0.4
PWM0.3
PWM0.2
PWM0.1
PWM0.0
R/W
Address: DAH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
PWM0L
PWM 0 Low Bits Register bit[7:0].
PWM0H – PWM 0 High Register
7
6
5
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM0.9
PWM0.8
Address: D2H
-
-
-
-
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1:0
PWM0H
Description
Reserved
PWM 0 High Bits Register bit[9:8].
PWM1L – PWM 1 Low Register
7
6
5
PWM1.7
Jan. 6, 2016
PWM1.6
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
PWM1.5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM1.4
PWM1.3
PWM1.2
PWM1.1
PWM1.0
Page 116 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
R/W
Address: DBH
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
PWM1L
PWM 0 Low Bits Register bit[7:0].
PWM1H – PWM 1 High Register
7
6
5
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM1.9
PWM1.8
Address: D3H
-
-
-
-
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1:0
PWM1H
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
PWM 1 High Bits Register bit[9:8]
PWM2L – PWM 2 Low Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM2.7
PWM2.6
PWM2.5
PWM2.4
PWM2.3
PWM2.2
PWM2.1
PWM2.0
R/W
Address: DDH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
PWM2L
PWM 2 Low Bits Register bit[7:0]
PWM2H – PWM 2 High Register
7
6
5
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM2.9
PWM2.8
Address: D5H
-
-
-
-
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1:0
PWM2H
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
PWM 2 High Bits Register bit[9:8]
PWM3L – PWM 3 Low Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWM3.7
PWM3.6
PWM3.5
PWM3.4
PWM3.3
PWM3.2
PWM3.1
PWM3.0
R/W
Address: DEH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
PWM3L
PWM 0 Low Bits Register bit[7:0]
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 117 of 189
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
PWM3H – PWM 3 High Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWM3.9
PWM3.8
Address: D6H
-
-
-
-
-
Bit
Name
7:2
-
1:0
PWM3H
Jan. 6, 2016
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
PWM 3 High Bits Register bit[9:8]
Page 118 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Figure 17-1 PWM Block Diagram
A compare value greater than the counter reloaded value is in the PWM output being permanently
low. In addition, there are two special cases. A compare value of all zeroes, 000H, causes the output
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 119 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
to remain permanently high. A compare value of all ones, 3FFH, results in the PWM output remaining
permanently low. Again the compare value is loaded into a Compare register. The transfer from this
holding register to the actual Compare register is under program control. The register assignments are
shown below where the number immediately following “PWMn” identifies the PWM output. Therefore,
the PWM0 controls the width of PWM0, PWM1 the width of PWM1 etc.
The overall functioning of the PWM module is controlled by the contents of the PWMCON0 register.
The operation of most of the control bits is straightforward. For example, there is an invert bit for each
output which causes results in the output to have the opposite value compared to its non-inverted
output. The transfer of the data from the Counter and Compare registers to the control registers is
controlled by the PWMCON0.6 (LOAD) while PWMCON0.7 (PWMRUN) allows the PWM to be either
in the run or idle state. The user can monitor when underflow causes the transfer to occur by
monitoring the Transfer bit PWCON1.6 (Load) or PWMCON0.5 (CF flag). Note that CF does not
assert interrupt. When the transfer takes place the PWM logic automatically resets those bits by the
next clock cycle.
A loading of new period and duty by setting Load should be ensured complete by monitoring it and
waiting for a hardware automatic clearing Load bit. Any updating of PWM control registers during Load
bit as logic 1 will cause unpredictable output.
PWMCON0 – PWM Control Register 0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWMRUN
Load
CF
CLRPWM
PWM3I
PWM2I
PWM1I
PWM0I
R/W
Address: DCH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
Name
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
PWMRUN 0 = PWM is not running.
1 = PWM counter is running.
6
Load
0 = The registers value of PWMP and Comparators are never loaded to counter
and Comparator registers.
1 = The PWMP register will be LOAD value to counter register after counter
underflow, and hardware will clear by next clock cycle.
5
CF
10-bit counter overflow flag:
0 = 10-bit counter down count is not underflow.
1 = 10-bit counter down count is underflow.
4
3
CLRPWM 1 = Clear 10-bit PWM counter to 000H.
PWM3I
0 = PWM3 output is non-inverted.
1 = PWM3 output is inverted.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 120 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
2
PWM2I
0 = PWM2 output is non-inverted.
1 = PWM2 output is inverted.
1
PWM1I
0 = PWM1 output is non-inverted.
1 = PWM1 output is inverted.
0
PWM0I
0 = PWM0 output is non-inverted.
1 = PWM0 output is inverted.
The fact that the transfer from the Counter and PWMn register to the working registers (10-bit Counter
and Compare register) only occurs when there is an underflow in the counter results in the need for
the user’s program to observe the following precautions. If PWMCON0 is written with Load set without
Run being enabled the transfer will never take place. Thus if a subsequent write sets Run without
Load the compare and counter values will not be those expected. If Load and Run are set, and prior to
underflow there is a subsequent LOAD of PWMCON0 which sets Run but not Load, the LOAD will
never take place. Again the compare and counter values that existed prior to the update attempt will
be used.
As outlined above the Load bit can be polled to determine when the LOAD occurs. Unless there is a
compelling reason to do otherwise, it is recommended that both PWMRUN (PWMCON0.7), and Load
(PWMCON0.6) be set when PWMCON0 is written.
When the PWMRUN bit, PWMCON0.7 is cleared the PWM outputs take on the state they had just
prior to the bit being cleared. In general, this state is not known. To place the outputs in a known state
when PWMRUN is cleared the Compare registers can be written to either the “always 1” or “always 0”
so the output will have the output desired when the counter is halted. After this PWMCON0 should be
written with the Load and Run bits are enabled. After this is done PWMCON0 is polled to find that the
Load or CF flag has taken place. Once the LOAD has occurred the Run bit in PWMCON0 can be
cleared. The outputs will retain the state they had just prior to the Run being cleared. If the Brake pin
(see discussion below in section concerning the operation of PWMCON1) is not used to control the
brake function, the “Brake when not running” function can be used to cause the outputs to have a
given state when the PWM is halted. This approach should be used only in time critical situations
when there is not sufficient time to use the approach outlined above since going from the Brake state
to run without causing an undefined state on the outputs is not straightforward. A discussion on this
topic is included in the PWMCON1 section.
PWMCON1 – PWM Control Register 1
7
6
5
BKCH
Jan. 6, 2016
BKPS
BPEN
4
3
2
1
0
BKEN
PWM3B
PWM2B
PWM1B
PWM0B
Page 121 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
R/W
Address: DFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7
BKCH
See the following table (when BKEN is set).
6
BKPS
0 = Brake is asserted if P0.2 is low.
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
1 = Brake is asserted if P0.2 is high
5
BPEN
See the following table (when BKEN is set).
4
BKEN
0 = Brake is never asserted.
1 = Brake is enabled, and see the following table.
3
PWM3B
0 = PWM3 output is low, when Brake is asserted.
1 = PWM3 output is high, when Brake is asserted.
2
PWM2B
0 = PWM2 output is low, when Brake is asserted.
1 = PWM2 output is high, when Brake is asserted.
1
PWM1B
0 = PWM1 output is low, when Brake is asserted.
1 = PWM1 output is high, when Brake is asserted.
0
PWM0B
0 = PWM0 output is low, when Brake is asserted.
1 = PWM0 output is high, when Brake is asserted.
Brake Condition Table
BPEN
BKCH
BREAK CONDITIONS
0
0
Brake on (software brake and keeping brake)
0
1
On, when PWM is not running (PWMRUN=0), the PWM output condition is follow PWMNB
setting.
Off, when PWM is running (PWMRUN=1).
1
0
Brake on, when break pin asserted, no PWM output, the bit of PWMRUN will be cleared and
BKF flag will be set. The PWM output condition is follow PWMNB setting.
1
1
Not active.
PWMCON2 – PWM Control Register 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
FP1
FP0
-
BKF
Address: D7H
-
-
-
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
7:4
-
Jan. 6, 2016
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Reserved
Page 122 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
3:2
FP[1:0]
Select PWM frequency pre-scalar select bits. The clock source of pre-scalar, Fpwm
is in phase with FSYS if PWMRUN=1.
1
-
0
BKF
FP[1:0]
Fpwm
00
FSYS (Default)
01
FSYS /2
10
FSYS /4
11
FSYS /16
Reserved
External Brake Pin Flag
0 = PWM is not brake.
1 = PWM is brake by external brake pin. It will be cleared by software.
The Brake function, which is controlled by the contents of the PWMCON1 register, is somewhat
unique. In general when Brake is asserted the four PWM outputs are forced to a user selected state,
namely the state selected by PWMCON1 bits 0 to 3. As shown in the description of the operation of
the PWMCON1 register if PWMCON1.4 is a “1” brake is asserted under the control PWMCON1.7,
BKCH, and PWMCON1.5, BPEN. As shown if both are a “0” Brake is asserted. If PWMCON1.7 is a
“1” brake is asserted when the run bit, PWMCON0.7, is a “0.” If PWMCON1.6 is a “1” brake is
asserted when the Brake Pin, P0.2, has the same polarity as PWMCON1.6. When brake is asserted in
response to this pin the RUN bit, PWMCON0.7, is automatically cleared and BKF(PWMCON2.0) flag
will be set. The combination of both PWMCON1.7 and PWMCON1.5 being a “1” is not allowed.
Since the Brake Pin being asserted will automatically clear the Run bit of PWMCON0.7and
BKF(PWMCON2.0) flag will be set, the user program can poll this bit or enable PWM’s brake interrupt
to determine when the Brake Pin causes a brake to occur. The other method for detecting a brake
caused by the Brake Pin would be to tie the Brake Pin to one of the external interrupt pins. This latter
approach is needed if the Brake signal can be of insufficient length to ensure that it can be captured
by a polling routine. When, after being asserted, the condition causing the brake is removed, the PWM
outputs go to whatever state that had immediately prior to the brake. This means that to go from brake
being asserted to having the PWM run without going through an indeterminate state care should be
taken. If the Brake Pin causes brake to be asserted the following prototype code will allow the PWM to
go from brake to run smoothly by software polling BKF flag or enable PWM’s interrupt.
Note that if a narrow pulse on the Brake Pin causes brake to be asserted, it may not be possible to go
through the above code before the end of the pulse. In this case, in addition to the code shown, an
external latch on the Brake Pin may be required to ensure that there is a smooth transition in going
from brake to run.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 123 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
PWM demo code is as follows:
ORG
SJMP
ORG
START:
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
0H
START
100H
PWMPH,#0
PWMPL,#0FFH
PWM0H,#0
PWM0L,#080H
PWM1H,#0
PWM1L,#0A0H
PWM2H,#0
PWM2L,#0C0H
PWM3H,#0
PWM3L,#0F0H
;PWM Frequency = Fsys/(1+PWMP)
;If Fsys=20MHz, PWM Frequency=78.1kHz
ORL
PWMCON0,#0D0H
;Start PWM
MOV
PWMCON1,#30H
;PWM will be stopped when P0.2 is low level.
;PWM output condition is follow PWMNB setting.
;In this case, PWM0B=PWM1B=PWM2B=PWM3B=0
;PWM0(P0.1) duty = PWM0/(1+PWMP)
;PWM1(P1.6) duty = PWM1/(1+PWMP)
;PWM2(P1.7) duty = PWM2/(1+PWMP)
;PWM3(P0.0) duty = PWM3/(1+PWMP)
END
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 124 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
18 Timed Access Protection (TA)
The N79E715 has several features like the Watchdog Timer, the ISP function, Boot select control, etc.
are crucial to proper operation of the system. If leaving these control registers unprotected, errant
code may write undetermined value into them, it results in incorrect operation and loss of control. To
prevent this risk, the N79E715 has a protection scheme which limits the write access to critical SFRs.
This protection scheme is done using a timed access. The following registers are related to TA
process.
TA – Timed Access
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TA[7:0]
W
Address: C7H
Reset value: 1111 1111B
Bit
Name
Description
7:0
TA[7:0]
Timed Access
The timed access register controls the access to protected SFRs. To access
protected bits, the user should first write AAH to the TA and immediately followed
by a write of 55H to TA. After the two steps, a writing permission window is
opened for three machine-cycles during which the user may write to protected
SFRs.
In timed access method, the bits, which are protected, have a timed write enable window. A write is
successful only if this window is active, otherwise the write will be discarded. When the software writes
AAH to TA, a counter is started. This counter waits for three machine-cycles looking for a write of 55H
to TA. If the second write of 55H occurs within three machine-cycles of the first write of AAH, then the
timed access window is opened. It remains open for three machine-cycles during which the user may
write to the protected bits. After three machine-cycles, this window automatically closes. Once the
window closes, the procedure should be repeated to access the other protected bits. Not that the TA
protected SFRs are required timed access for writing. However, the reading is not protected. The user
may read TA protected SFR without giving AAH and 55H to TA. The suggestion code for opening the
timed access window is shown below.
(CLR
EA)
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
MOV
TA, #0AAH
MOV
TA, #55H
(Instruction that writes a TA protected register)
(SETB EA)
;resume interrupts enabled
The writes of AAH and 55H should occur within 3 machine-cycles of each other. Interrupts should be
disabled during this procedure to avoid delay between the two writes. If there is no interrupt enabled,
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 125 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
the CLR EA and SETB EA instructions can be left out. Once the timed access window closes, the
procedure should be repeated to access the other protected bits.
Examples of timed assessing are shown to illustrate correct or incorrect writing processes.
Example 1,
(CLR
MOV
MOV
ORL
(SETB
EA)
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
CHPCON,#data
EA)
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;resume interrupts enabled
EA)
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;1 machine-cycle.
;1 machine-cycle.
;2 machine-cycles.
;resume interrupts enabled
Example 2,
(CLR
MOV
MOV
NOP
NOP
ANL
(SETB
ISPTRG,#data
EA)
Example 3,
(CLR
MOV
NOP
MOV
MOV
ORL
(SETB
EA)
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#data1
PMCR,#data2
EA)
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;2 machine-cycles.
;1 machine-cycle.
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;resume interrupts enabled
Example 4,
(CLR
MOV
NOP
NOP
MOV
ANL
(SETB
EA)
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
WDCON0,#data
EA)
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;2 machine-cycles.
;1 machine-cycle.
;1 machine-cycle.
;2 machine-cycles.
;2 machine-cycles.
;resume interrupts enabled
In the first example, the writing to the protected bits is done before the three machine-cycle window
closes. In example 2, however, the writing to ISPTRG does not complete during the window opening,
there will be no change of the value of ISPTRG. In example 3, the WDCON0 is successful written but
the PMCR access is out of the three machine-cycle window. Therefore, PMCR value will not change
either. In Example 4, the second write 55H to TA completes after three machine-cycles of the first
write TA of AAH, therefore the timed access window in not opened at all, and the write to the protected
bit fails.
In N79E715, the TA protected SFRs include PMCR(A3H), CHPCON (9FH), ISPTRG (A4H), SHBDA
(9CH), WDCON0 (D8H), and WDCON1 (ABH).
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 126 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
19 Interrupt System
The N79E715 has four priority level of interrupts structure with 14 interrupt sources. Each of the
interrupt sources has an individual priority bit, flag, interrupt vector and enable bit. In addition, the
interrupts can be globally enabled or disabled.
19.1 Interrupt Sources
The External Interrupts INT0 and INT1 can be either edge triggered or level triggered, depending on
bits IT0 and IT1. The bits IE0 and IE1 in the TCON register are the flags which are checked to
generate the interrupt. In the edge triggered mode, the INTx inputs are sampled in every machinecycle. If the sample is high in one cycle and low in the next, then a high to low transition is detected
and the interrupts request flag IEx in TCON is set. The flag bit requests the interrupt. Since the
external interrupts are sampled every machine-cycle, they have to be held high or low for at least one
complete machine-cycle. The IEx flag is automatically cleared when the service routine is called. If the
level triggered mode is selected, then the requesting source has to hold the pin low till the interrupt is
serviced. The IEx flag will not be cleared by the hardware on entering the service routine. If the
interrupt continues to be held low even after the service routine is completed, then the processor may
acknowledge another interrupt request from the same source.
The Timer 0 and 1 Interrupts are generated by the TF0 and TF1 flags. These flags are set by the
overflow in the Timer 0 and Timer 1. The TF0 and TF1 flags are automatically cleared by the hardware
when the timer interrupt is serviced.
The Watchdog timer can be used as a system monitor or a simple timer. In either case, when the
timeout
count is reached, the Watchdog Timer interrupt flag WDTRF (WDCON0.3) is set. If the interrupt is
enabled by the enable bit EIE.4, then an interrupt will occur.
The Serial block can generate interrupt on reception or transmission. There are two interrupt sources
from the Serial block, which are obtained by the RI and TI bits in the SCON SFR. These bits are not
automatically cleared by the hardware, and the user will have to clear these bits using software.
2
I C will generate an interrupt due to a new SIO state present in I2STA register, if both EA and ES bits
(in IE register) are both enabled.
SPI asserts interrupt flag, SPIF, upon completion of data transfer with an external device. If SPI
interrupt is enabled (ESPI at EIE.6), a serial peripheral interrupt is generated. SPIF flag is software
clear, by writing 0. MODF and SPIOVF will also generate interrupt if occur. They share the same
vector address as SPIF.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 127 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
The ADC can generate interrupt after finished ADC converter. There is one interrupt source, which is
obtained by the ADCI bit in the ADCCON0 SFR. This bit is not automatically cleared by the hardware,
and the user will have to clear this bit using software.
PWM brake interrupt flag BKF is generated if P0.2 (Brake pin) detects a high (BKPS=1) or low
(BKPS=0) at port pin. At this moment, BKF (PWMCON2.0) is set by hardware and it should be cleared
by software. PWM period interrupt flag CF is set by hardware when its’ 10-bit down counter underflow
and is only cleared by software. BKF is set the PWM interrupt is requested If PWM interrupt is
enabled (EPWM=1).
Keyboard interrupt is generated when any of the keypad connected to P0 pins detects a low-level or
edge changed at port pin. Each keypad interrupt can be individually enabled or disabled. The KBI flag
(KBIF[7:0]) should be cleared by software.
POR detect can cause POF flag, BOF, to be asserted if power voltage drop below BOD voltage level.
Interrupt will occur if EBOD (IE.5) and global interrupt enable (EA) are set.
All the bits that generate interrupts can be set or reset by software, and thereby software initiated
interrupts can be generated. Each of the individual interrupts can be enabled or disabled by setting or
clearing a bit in the IE SFR. IE also has a global enable/disable bit EA, in which can be cleared to
disable all the interrupts.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 128 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
IE0
EX0
IE1
EX1
BOF
EBOD
KBIF[7:0]
EKB
Wakeup
(If in Power Down)
WDTF
WDTEN
TF0
ET0
ADCI
EADC
TF1
CPTF0
CPTF1
CPTF2
Interrupt
To CPU
EA
ET1
RI+TI
ECPTF
ES
TF2
SI
ET2
I2TOF
EI2C
BKF
EPWM
SPIF
MODF
SPIOVF
ESPI
Figure 19-1 Interrupt Flag Block Diagram
19.2 Priority Level Structure
There are four priority levels for the interrupts, highest, high, low and lowest. The interrupt sources can
be individually set to either high or low levels. Naturally, a higher priority interrupt cannot be
interrupted by a lower priority interrupt. However there exists a pre-defined hierarchy amongst the
interrupts themselves. This hierarchy comes into play when the interrupt controller has to resolve
simultaneous requests having the same priority level. This hierarchy is defined as shown in Table
19-3, the interrupts are numbered starting from the highest priority to the lowest.
The interrupt flags are sampled every machine-cycle. In the same machine-cycle, the sampled
interrupts are polled and their priority is resolved. If certain conditions are met then the hardware will
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 129 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
execute an internally generated LCALL instruction which will vector the process to the appropriate
interrupt vector address. The conditions for generating the LCALL include:
1. An interrupt of equal or higher priority is not currently being serviced.
2. The current polling cycle is the last machine-cycle of the instruction currently being executed.
3. The current instruction does not involve a write to IE, EIE, IP, IPH, EIP or IPH1 registers and is not
a RETI.
If any of these conditions are not met, then the LCALL will not be generated. The polling cycle is
repeated every machine-cycle, with the interrupts sampled in the same machine-cycle. If an interrupt
flag is active in one cycle but not responded to, and is not active when the above conditions are met,
the denied interrupt will not be serviced. This means that active interrupts are not remembered; every
polling cycle is new.
The processor responds to a valid interrupt by executing an LCALL instruction to the appropriate
service routine. This may or may not clear the flag which caused the interrupt. In case of Timer
interrupts, the TF0 or TF1 flags are cleared by hardware whenever the processor vectors to the
appropriate timer service routine. In case of external interrupt, INT0 and INT1, the flags are cleared
only if they are edge triggered. In case of Serial interrupts, the flags are not cleared by hardware. In
the case of Timer 2 interrupt, the flags are not cleared by hardware. The hardware LCALL behaves
exactly like the software LCALL instruction. This instruction saves the Program Counter contents onto
the Stack, but does not save the Program Status Word PSW. The PC is reloaded with the vector
address of that interrupt which caused the LCALL. These address of vector for the different sources
are as follows.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 130 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 19-1 Vector Locations for Interrupt Sources
Source
Vector Address
Source
Vector Address
External Interrupt 0
0003h
Timer 0 Overflow
000Bh
External Interrupt 1
0013h
Timer 1 Overflow
001Bh
Serial Port
0023h
Timer 2
Overflow/Match
002Bh
I C Interrupt
0033h
KBI Interrupt
003Bh
BOD Interrupt
0043h
SPI Interrupt
004Bh
Watchdog Timer
0053h
ADC Interrupt
005Bh
Capture
0063h
PWM brake Interrupt
0073h
2
The vector table is not evenly spaced; this is to accommodate future expansions to the device family.
Table 19-2 Four-level Interrupt Priority
Priority bits
Interrupt Priority Level
IPXH
IPX
0
0
Level 0 (Lowest priority)
0
1
Level 1
1
0
Level 2
1
1
Level 3 (highest priority)
Execution continues from the vectored address till an RETI instruction is executed. On execution of
the RETI instruction the processor pops the Stack and loads the PC with the contents at the top of the
stack. The user should watch out for the status of the stack is restored to whatever after the hardware
LCALL, if the execution is to return to the interrupted program. The processor does not notice anything
if the stack contents are modified and will proceed with execution from the address put back into PC.
Note that a RET instruction would perform exactly the same process as a RETI instruction, but it
would not inform the Interrupt Controller that the interrupt service routine is completed, and would
leave the controller still thinking that the service routine is underway.
The N79E715 uses a four-priority level interrupt structure. This allows great flexibility in controlling the
handling of the N79E715 many interrupt sources. The N79E715 supports up to 14 interrupt sources.
Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled by setting or clearing a bit in registers IE
or EIE. The IE register also contains a global disable bit, EA, which disables all interrupts at once.
Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of four priority levels by setting or
clearing bits in the IP, IPH, EIP, and EIPH registers. An interrupt service routine in progress can be
interrupted by a higher priority interrupt, but not by another interrupt of the same or lower priority. The
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 131 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
highest priority interrupt service cannot be interrupted by any other interrupt source. So, if two
requests of different priority levels are received simultaneously, the request of higher priority level is
serviced.
If requests of the same priority level are received simultaneously, an internal polling sequence
determines which request is serviced. This is called the arbitration ranking. Note that the arbitration
ranking is only used to resolve simultaneous requests of the same priority level.
The following table summarizes the interrupt sources, flag bits, vector addresses, enable bits, priority
bits, arbitration ranking, and whether each interrupt may wake up the CPU from Power-down mode.
Table 19-3 Summary of interrupt sources
Description
Interrupt
Flag
Bit(s)
Vector
Address
Interrupt
Enable
Bit(s)
Flag
cleared by
Interrupt
Priority
Arbitration
Ranking
Powerdown
Wake-up
External Interrupt
0
IE0
0003H
EX0 (IE0.0)
Hardware,
Software
IPH.0,
IP.0
1
(highest)
Yes
BOD Detect
BOF
0043H
EBOD (IE.5)
Software
IPH.5,
IP.5
2
Yes
Watchdog Timer
WDTF
0053H
EWDI
(EIE.4)
Software
EIPH.4,
EIP.4
3
Yes
Timer 0 Interrupt
TF0
000BH
ET0 (IE.1)
Hardware,
Software
IPH.1,
IP.1
4
No
I C Interrupt
SI
I2TOF
0033H
EI2C (EIE.0)
Software
EIPH.0,
EIP.0
5
No
ADC Converter
ADCI
005BH
EADC (IE.6)
Software
IPH.6,
IP.6
6
Yes(1)
External Interrupt
1
IE1
0013H
EX1 (IE.2)
Hardware,
Software
IPH.2,
IP.2
7
Yes
KBI Interrupt
KBIF[7:0]
003BH
EKB (EIE.1)
Software
EIPH.1,
EIP.1
8
Yes
Timer 1 Interrupt
TF1
001BH
ET1 (IE.3)
Hardware,
Software
IPH.3,
IP.3
9
No
Serial Port Tx
and Rx
TI & RI
0023H
ES (IE.4)
Software
IPH.4,
IP.4
10
No
PWM Interrupt
BKF
0073H
EPWM
(EIE.5)
Software
EIPH.5,
EIP.5
11
No
SPI
SPIF +
MODF +
SPIOVF
004BH
ESPI (EIE.6)
Software
EIPH.6,
EIP.6
12
No
Timer 2
Overflow/Match
TF2
002Bh
ET2 (EIE.7)
Software
EIPH.7,
EIP.7
13
No
Capture
CAPF0-2
0063H
ECPTF
(EIE.2)
Software
IPH.7,
IP.7
14
(lowest)
No
2
[1] The ADC Converter can wake up “Power-down mode” when its clock source is from HIRC.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 132 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
19.3 Interrupt Response Time
The response time for each interrupt source depends on several factors, such as the nature of the
interrupt and the instruction underway. In the case of external interrupts INT0 to RI+TI, they are
sampled at C3 of every machine-cycle and then their corresponding interrupt flags IEx will be set or
reset. The Timer 0 and 1 overflow flags are set at C3 of the machine-cycle in which overflow has
occurred. These flag values are polled only in the next machine-cycle. If a request is active and all
three conditions are met, then the hardware generated LCALL is executed. This LCALL itself takes
four machine-cycles to be completed. Thus there is a minimum time of five machine-cycles between
the interrupt flag being set and the interrupt service routine being executed.
A longer response time should be anticipated if any of the three conditions are not met. If a higher or
equal priority is being serviced, the interrupt latency time is obviously dependent on the nature of the
service routine currently being executed. If the polling cycle is not the last machine-cycle of the
instruction being executed, an additional delay is introduced. The maximum response time (if no other
interrupt is in service) occurs if the N79E715 performs a write to IE, EIE, IP, IPH, EIP or EIPH and
then executes a MUL or DIV instruction. From the time an interrupt source is activated, the longest
reaction time is 12 machine-cycles. This includes 1 machine-cycle to detect the interrupt, 3 machinecycles to complete the IE, EIE, IP, IPH, EIP or EIPH access, 5 machine-cycles to complete the MUL or
DIV instruction and 4 machine-cycles to complete the hardware LCALL to the interrupt vector location.
Thus in a single-interrupt system the interrupt response time will always be more than 5 machinecycles and not more than 12 machine-cycles. The maximum latency of 12 machine-cycle is 48 clock
cycles. Note that in the standard 8051 the maximum latency is 8 machine-cycles which equals 96
machine-cycles. This is a 50% reduction in terms of clock periods.
19.4 SFR of Interrupt
The SFRs associated with these interrupts are listed below.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 133 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
IE – Interrupt Enable (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
EA
EADC
EBOD
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: A8H
Bit
Name
7
EA
4
ES
R/W
3
ET1
R/W
2
EX1
R/W
1
0
ET0
EX0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
Enable All Interrupt
This bit globally enables/disables all interrupts. It overrides the individual interrupt
mask settings.
0 = Disable all interrupt sources.
1 = Enable each interrupt depending on its individual mask setting. Individual
interrupts will occur if enabled.
6
EADC
Enable ADC Interrupt
5
EBOD
Enable BOD Interrupt
4
ES
Enable Serial Port (UART) Interrupt
0 = Disable all UART interrupts.
1 = Enable interrupt generated by TI (SCON.1) or RI (SCON.0).
3
ET1
Enable Timer 1 Interrupt
0 = Disable Timer 1 interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt generated by TF1 (TCON.7).
2
EX1
Enable External interrupt 1
0 = Disable external interrupt 1.
1 = Enable interrupt generated by INT1 pin (P1.4).
1
ET0
Enable Timer 0 Interrupt
0 = Disable Timer 0 interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt generated by TF0 (TCON.5).
0
EX0
Enable External Interrupt 0
0 = Disable external interrupt 0.
1 = Enable interrupt generated by INT0 pin (P1.3).
EIE – Extensive Interrupt Enable
7
6
5
ET2
ESPI
EPWM
Jan. 6, 2016
4
EWDI
3
-
Page 134 of 189
2
ECPTF
1
EKB
0
EI2C
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
R/W
Address: E8H
Bit
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
Name
ET2
Description
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
0 = Disable Timer 2 Interrupt.
1 = Enable Timer 2 Interrupt.
6
ESPI
SPI interrupt enable:
0 = Disable SPI Interrupt.
1 = Enable SPI Interrupt.
5
EPWM
0 = Disable PWM Interrupt when external brake pin was braked.
1 = Enable PWM Interrupt when external brake pin was braked.
4
EWDI
0 = Disable Watchdog Timer Interrupt.
1 = Enable Watchdog Timer Interrupt.
3
-
2
ECPTF
Reserved
0 = Disable capture interrupts.
1 = Enable capture interrupts.
1
EKB
0 = Disable Keypad Interrupt.
1 = Enable Keypad Interrupt.
0
EI2C
2
0 = Disable I C Interrupt.
2
1 = Enable I C Interrupt.
IP – Interrupt Priority-0 Register
7
6
5
PCAP
PADC
PBOD
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: B8H
Bit
4
PS
R/W
3
PT1
R/W
2
PX1
R/W
1
0
PT0
PX0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Name
PCAP
Description
7
6
PADC
1 = Set interrupt priority of ADC as higher priority level.
5
PBOD
1 = Set interrupt priority of BOD Detector as higher priority level.
4
PS
Jan. 6, 2016
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Capture 0/1/2 as highest priority level.
1 = Set interrupt priority of Serial port 0 as higher priority level.
Page 135 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
3
Name
PT1
Description
2
PX1
1 = Set interrupt priority of External interrupt 1 as higher priority level.
1
PT0
1 = Set interrupt priority of Timer 0 as higher priority level.
0
PX0
1 = Set interrupt priority of External interrupt 0 as higher priority level.
1 = Set interrupt priority of Timer 1 as higher priority level.
IPH – Interrupt High Priority Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCAPH
PADCH
PBODH
PSH
PT1H
PX1H
PT0H
PX0H
R/W
Address: B7H
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7
PCAPH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Capture 0/1/2 as highest priority level.
6
PADCH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of ADC as the highest priority level.
5
PBODH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of BOD Detector as the highest priority level.
4
PSH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Serial port 0 as the highest priority level.
3
PT1H
1 = Ro set interrupt high priority of Timer 1 as the highest priority level.
2
PX1H
1 = Set interrupt high priority of External interrupt 1 as the highest priority level.
1
PT0H
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Timer 0 as the highest priority level.
0
PX0H
1 = Set interrupt high priority of External interrupt 0 as the highest priority level.
EIP – Interrupt Priority-1 Register
7
6
5
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
4
3
2
1
0
PT2
PSPI
PPWM
PWDI
-
-
PKB
PI2
R/W
Address: FFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
Name
Description
Bit
7
PT2
1 = Set interrupt priority of Timer 2 as higher priority level.
PSPI
1 = Set interrupt priority of SPI as higher priority level.
5
PPWM
1 = Set interrupt priority of PWM’s brake as higher priority level.
4
PWDI
6
Jan. 6, 2016
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
1 = Set interrupt priority of Watchdog as higher priority level.
Page 136 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
3:2
-
1
PKB
0
PI2
Description
Reserved
1 = Set interrupt priority of Keypad as higher priority level.
2
1 = Set interrupt priority of I C as higher priority level.
EIPH – Interrupt High Priority-1 Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PT2H
PSPIH
PPWMH
PWDIH
-
-
PKBH
PI2H
R/W
Address: F7H
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
Name
Description
Bit
7
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
PT2H
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Timer 2 as the highest priority level.
6
PSPIH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of SPI as the highest priority level.
5
PPWMH
4
3:2
PWDIH
-
1 = Set interrupt high priority of PWM’s external brake pin as the highest priority
level.
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Watchdog as the highest priority level.
Reserved
1
PKBH
1 = Set interrupt high priority of Keypad as the highest priority level.
0
PI2H
1 = Set interrupt high priority of I C as the highest priority level.
2
TCON – Timer 0 and 1 Control (Bit-addressable)
7
6
5
4
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 88H
Bit
Name
3
IE1
3
IE1
R/W
2
IT1
R/W
1
0
IE0
IT0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
External Interrupt 1 Edge Flag
This flag is set via hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is
detected. If IT1 = 1, this bit will remain set until it is cleared via software or at the
beginning of the External Interrupt 1 service routine. If IT1 = 0, this flag is the
inverse of the INT1 input signal's logic level.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 137 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
2
IT1
Description
External Interrupt 1 Type Selection
This bit selects whether the INT1 pin will detect falling edge or low level triggered
interrupts.
0 = INT1 is low level triggered.
1 = INT1 is falling edge triggered.
1
IE0
External Interrupt 0 Edge Flag
This flag is set via hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is
detected. If IT0 = 1, this bit will remain set until cleared via software or at the
beginning of the External Interrupt 0 service routine. If IT0 = 0, this flag is the
inverse of the INT0 input signal's logic level.
0
IT0
External Interrupt 0 Type Selection
This bit selects whether the INT0 pin will detect falling edge or low level triggered
interrupts.
0 = INT0 is low level triggered.
1 = INT0 is falling edge triggered.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 138 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
20 In System Programming (ISP)
The internal Program Memory and on-chip Data Flash support both hardware programming and in
system programming (ISP). Hardware programming mode uses gang-writers to reduce programming
costs and time to market while the products enter the mass production state. However, if the product
is just under development or the end product needs firmware updating in the hand of an end user, the
hardware programming mode will make repeated programming difficult and inconvenient. ISP method
makes it easy and possible. The N79E715 supports ISP mode allowing a device to be reprogrammed
under software control. The capability to update the application firmware makes VDD = 3.0V ~ 5.5V of
applications.
ISP is performed without removing the microcontroller from the system. The most common method to
perform ISP is via UART along with the firmware in LDROM. General speaking, PC transfers the new
APROM code through serial port. Then LDROM firmware receives it and re-programs into APROM
through ISP commands. Nuvoton provides ISP firmware, please visit Nuvoton 8-bit Microcontroller
website below and select “Nuvoton ISP-ICP Programmer”.
http://www.nuvoton.com/hq/products/microcontrollers/8bit-8051-mcus/Software
20.1 ISP Procedure
Unlike RAM’s real-time operation, to update flash data often takes long time. Furthermore, it is a quite
complex timing procedure to erase, program, or read flash data. Fortunately, the N79E715 carried out
the flash operation with convenient mechanism to help the user update the flash content. After ISP
enabled by setting ISPEN (CHPCON.0 with TA protected), the user can easily fill the 16-bit target
address in ISPAH and ISPAL, data in ISPFD and command in ISPCN. Then the ISP is ready to begin
by setting a triggering bit ISPGO (ISPTRG.0). Note that ISPTRG is also TA protected. At this moment,
the CPU holds the Program Counter and the built-in ISP automation takes over to control the internal
charge-pump for high voltage and the detail signal timing. After ISP action completed, the Program
Counter continues to run the following instructions. The ISPGO bit will be automatic cleared by
hardware. The user may repeat steps above for next ISP action if necessary. Through this progress,
the user can easily erase, program, and verify the embedded flash by just watching out for the pure
software. Nominally, a page-erase time is 20 ms and a byte-program time is 40 μs.
The following registers are related to ISP processing.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 139 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CHPCON – Chip Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
ISPF
LDUEN
BS
ISPEN
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 9FH
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
6
ISPF
Description
ISP Fault Flag
The hardware will set this bit when any of the following condition is met:
1. The accessing area is illegal, such as,
(a) Erasing or programming APROM itself when APROM code runs.
(b) Erasing or programming LDROM when APROM code runs but LDUEN is 0.
(c) Erasing, programming, or reading CONFIG bytes when APROM code runs.
(d) Erasing or programming LDROM itself when LDROM code runs.
(e) Accessing oversize.
2. The ISP operating runs from internal Program Memory to external one.
This bit should be cleared via software.
5
LDUEN
Updating LDROM Enable
0 = LDROM is inhibited to be erased or programmed when APROM code runs.
LDROM remains read-only.
1 = LDROM is allowed to be fully accessed when APROM code runs.
4:2
-
Reserved
Boot Selection
There are different meanings of writing to or reading from this bit.
Writing
It defines from which block MCU boots after all resets.
0 = The next rebooting will be from APROM.
1
BS
1 = The next rebooting will be from LDROM.
Reading
It indicates from which block MCU booted after previous reset.
0 = The previous rebooting is from APROM.
1 = The previous rebooting is from LDROM.
0
Jan. 6, 2016
ISPEN
ISP Enable
Page 140 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
0 = Enable ISP function.
1 = Disable ISP function.
To enable ISP function will start the HIRC for timing control. To clear ISPEN
should always be the last instruction after ISP operation to stop HIRC for reducing
power consumption.
ISPCN – ISP Control
7
6
ISPA17
ISPA16
R/W
R/W
Address: AFH
5
FOEN
R/W
Bit
Name
Description
7:6
ISPA[17:16]
ISP Control
5
FOEN
4
FCEN
3:0
FCTRL[3:0]
4
FCEN
R/W
3
FCTRL.3
R/W
2
FCTRL.2
R/W
1
0
FCTRL.1
FCTRL.0
R/W
R/W
Reset value: 0011 0000B
This byte is for ISP controlling command to decide ISP destinations and
actions.
ISPAH – ISP Address High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ISPA[15:8]
R/W
Address: A7H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
ISPA[15:8]
Description
ISP Address High Byte
ISPAH contains address ISPA[15:8] for ISP operations.
ISPAL – ISP Address Low Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ISPA[7:0]
R/W
Address: A6H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
ISPA[7:0]
Description
ISP Address Low Byte
ISPAL contains address ISPA[7:0] for ISP operations.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 141 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
ISPFD – ISP Flash Data
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ISPFD[7:0]
R/W
Address: AEH
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
ISPFD[7:0]
Description
ISP Flash Data
This byte contains flash data which is read from or is going to be written to the
flash memory. The user should write data into ISPFD for program mode before
triggering ISP processing and read data from ISPFD for read/verify mode after
ISP processing is finished.
ISPTRG – ISP Trigger (TA Protected)
7
6
5
Address: A4H
Bit
Name
Description
0
ISPGO
ISP Begin
4
-
-
3
-
2
-
1
0
ISPGO
W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
ISP begins by setting this bit as logic 1. After this instruction, the CPU holds the
Program Counter (PC) and the ISP hardware automation takes over to control
the progress. After ISP action completed, the Program Counter continues to run
the following instructions. The ISPGO bit will be automatically cleared and
always read as logic 0.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 142 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
20.2 ISP Command Table
ISPCN
ISPAH, ISPAL
ISPFD
ISP Command
A17, A16
FOEN
FCEN
FCTRL[3:0]
A[15:0]
D[7:0]
x, x[1]
0
0
1011
x[1]
Data out
D[7:0]=DAH
FLASH Page Erase
0, 0
1
0
0010
Address in
A[15:0]
x[1]
FLASH Program
0, 0
1
0
0001
Address in
A[15:0]
Data in
D[7:0]
FLASH Read
0, 0
0
0
0000
Address in
A[15:0]
Data out
D[7:0]
FLASH Page Erase
0, 1
1
0
0010
Address in
A[15:0]
x[1]
FLASH Program
0, 1
1
0
0001
Address in
A[15:0]
Data in
D[7:0]
FLASH Read
0, 1
0
0
0000
Address in
A[15:0]
Data out
D[7:0]
CONFIG[2] Page Erase
1, 1
1
0
0010
Address in
A[15:0]=0000H
x[1]
CONFIG[2] Program
1, 1
1
0
0001
Address in
A[15:0]
Data in
D[7:0]
CONFIG[2] Read
1, 1
0
0
0000
Address in
A[15:0]
Data out
D[7:0]
Read Company ID
APROM
&
Data Flash
LDROM
Note:
[1] ‘x’ means ‘don’t care’.
[2] The ‘CONFIG’ means the MCU hardware configuration.
[3] Each page has 128 bytes. So, the address for Page Erase should be 0000, 0080H, 0100H, 0180H, 0200H, .., which is
incremented by 0080H.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 143 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
20.3 Access Table of ISP Programming
Destination
UNLOCK
LOCK
ISP Code Residence
ISP Code Residence
APROM
APROM
LDROM
LDROM
APROM
LDROM
[1]
[1]
Data Flash
CONFIGs
[2]
[2]
ID (read)
Note:
Fully accessing
Read only
Accessing inhibit
[1]
[2]
I.
II.
III.
LDUE should be 1, or it will be read only.
New CONFIG functions after POR, WDT, Reset pin or software reset
CONFIG full accessing by LDROM while LOCK.
Inhibit APROM jump to LDROM or LDROM jump to APROM.
MCU run in APROM cannot read CONFIGs.
20.4 ISP User Guide
ISP facilitates the updating flash contents in a convenient way; however, the user should follow some
restricted laws in order that the ISP operates correctly. Without noticing warnings will possible cause
undetermined results even serious damages of devices. Be attention of these notices. Furthermore,
this paragraph will also support useful suggestions during ISP procedures.
(1) If no more ISP operation needs, the user should clear ISPEN (CHPCON.0) to zero. It will make the
system void to trigger ISP unaware. Furthermore, ISP requires HIRC running. If the external clock
source is chosen, disabling ISP will stop HIRC for saving power consumption. Note that a write to
ISPEN is TA protected.
(2) CONFIG bytes can be ISP fully accessed only when loader code executing in LDROM. New
CONFIG bytes other than CBS bit activate after all resets. New CBS bit activates after resets other
than software reset.
(3) When the LOCK bit (CONFIG0.1) is activated, ISP reading, writing, or erasing can still be valid.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 144 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
(4) ISP works under VDD = 3.0V ~ 5.5V.
(5) APROM and LDROM can read itself through ISP method.
Note: If the user would like to develop ISP program, always erase and program CONFIG bytes
at the last step for data security.
20.5 ISP Demo Code
Common Subroutine for ISP
Enable_ISP:
MOV
CLR
MOV
MOV
ORL
SETB
CALL
RET
ISPCN,#00110000b
EA
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
CHPCON,#00000001b
EA
Trigger_ISP
;select “Standby” mode
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;CHPCON is TA-Protection
;
;ISPEN=1, enable ISP function
;
Disable_ISP:
MOV
CALL
CLR
MOV
MOV
ANL
SETB
RET
ISPCN,#00110000b
Trigger_ISP
EA
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
CHPCON,#11111110b
EA
;select “Standby” mode
;
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;CHPCON is TA-Protection
;
;ISPEN=0, disable ISP function
Trigger_ISP:
CLR
MOV
MOV
MOV
SETB
RET
EA
TA,#0AAH
TA,#55H
ISPTRG,#00000001b
EA
;if any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;ISPTRG is TA-Protection
;
;write ‘1’ to bit ISPGO to trigger an ISP processing
Read Company ID
CALL
Enable_ISP
MOV
ISPCN,#00001011b
CALL
Trigger_ISP
MOV
A,ISPFD
ACC for
;select “Read Company ID” mode
;now, ISPFD contains Company ID (should be DAH), move to
;further use
CALL
Disable_ISP
Read Device ID
CALL
MOV
Enable_ISP
ISPCN,#00001100b
Jan. 6, 2016
;select “Read Device ID” mode
Page 145 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
MOV
ISPAH,#00H
MOV
ISPAL,#00H
CALL
Trigger_ISP
MOV
A,ISPFD
further use
MOV
ISPAH,#00H
MOV
ISPAL,#01H
CALL
Trigger_ISP
MOV
A,ISPFD
further use
CALL
Disable_ISP
;fill address with 0000H for low-byte DID
;
;now,
ISPFD
contains
low-byte
DID,
move
to
ACC
for
to
ACC
for
(A17,A16)=(0,0)
for
;fill address with 0001H for high-byte DID
;
;now,
ISPFD
contains
high-byte
DID,
move
FLASH Page Erase (target address in APROM/Data Flash/LDROM area)
CALL
Enable_ISP
MOV
ISPCN,#00100010b
APROM/Data
MOV
MOV
CALL
CALL
ISPAH,#??H
ISPAL,#??H
Trigger_ISP
Disable_ISP
;select
“FLASH
Page
Erase”
mode,
;Flash/LDROM
;fill page address
FLASH Program (target address in APROM/Data Flash/LDROM area)
CALL
Enable_ISP
MOV
ISPCN,#00100001b
APROM/Data
MOV
MOV
MOV
CALL
CALL
ISPAH,#??H
ISPAL,#??H
ISPFD,#??H
Trigger_ISP
Disable_ISP
;select
“FLASH
Program”
mode,
(A17,A16)=(0,0)
for
;Flash/LDROM
;fill byte address
;fill data to be programmed
FLASH Read (target address in APROM/Data Flash/LDROM area)
CALL
MOV
Enable_ISP
ISPCN,#00000000b
MOV
ISPAH,#??H
MOV
ISPAL,#??H
CALL
Trigger_ISP
MOV
A,ISPFD
further use
CALL
Disable_ISP
;select “FLASH Read” mode, (A17,A16)=(0,0) for APROM/Data
;Flash/LDROM
;fill byte address
;now, ISPFD contains the Flash data, move to ACC for
CONFIG Page Erase (target address in CONFIG area)
CALL
MOV
CONFIG
MOV
MOV
CALL
CALL
Enable_ISP
ISPCN,#11100010b
ISPAH,#00H
ISPAL,#00H
Trigger_ISP
Disable_ISP
;select
“CONFIG
Page
Erase”
mode,
(A17,A16)=(1,1)
for
;fill page address #0000H, because there is only one page
CONFIG Program (target address in CONFIG area)
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 146 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CALL
Enable_ISP
MOV
ISPCN,#11100001b
MOV
ISPAH,#00H
CONFIG0/1/2/3,
;select “CONFIG Program” mode, (A17,A16)=(1,1) for CONFIG
;fill
byte
address,
0000H/0001H/0002H/0003H
for
;respectively
MOV
MOV
CALL
ISPAL,#??H
ISPFD,#??H
Trigger_ISP
CALL
Disable_ISP
;fill data to be programmed
CONFIG Read (target address in CONFIG area)
CALL
Enable_ISP
MOV
ISPCN,#11000000b
MOV
ISPAH,#00H
CONFIG0/1/2/3,
;select “CONFIG Read” mode, (A17,A16)=(1,1) for CONFIG
;
fill
byte
address,
0000H/0001H/0002H/0003H
for
;respectively
MOV
ISPAL,#??H
CALL
Trigger_ISP
MOV
A,ISPFD
further
;now, ISPFD contains the CONFIG data, move to ACC for
;use
CALL
Disable_ISP
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 147 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
21 Power Management
The N79E715 has several features that help the user to control the power consumption of the device.
The power saved features have Power-down mode and Idle mode operations. For a stable current
consumption, user should watch out for the states of P0 pins.
In system power saving modes, user should specifically watch out for the Watchdog Timer. The
hardware will clear WDT counter automatically after entering or being woken-up from Idle or Powerdown mode. It prevents unconscious system reset.
PCON – Power Control
7
6
SMOD
SMOD0
R/W
R/W
Address: 87H
Bit
Name
1
PD
5
-
4
3
2
1
0
POF
GF1
GF0
PD
IDL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Description
Power-down Mode
Setting this bit puts MCU into Power-down mode. Under this mode, both CPU and
peripheral clocks stop and Program Counter (PC) suspends. It provides the lowest
power consumption. After CPU is woken up from Power Down, this bit will be
automatically cleared via hardware and the program continue executing the
interrupt service routine (ISR) of the very interrupt source that woke the system up
before. After return from the ISR, the device continues execution at the instruction
which follows the instruction that put the system into Power-down mode.
Note: If IDL bit and PD bit are set simultaneously, the MCU will enter Power-down
mode. Then it does not go to Idle mode after exiting Power Down.
0
IDL
Idle Mode
Setting this bit puts MCU into Idle mode. Under this mode, the CPU clock stops
and Program Counter (PC) suspends. After CPU is woken up from Idle, this bit will
be automatically cleared via hardware and the program continue executing the
ISR of the very interrupt source that woke the system up before. After return from
the ISR, the device continues execution at the instruction which follows the
instruction that put the system into Idle mode.
21.1 Idle Mode
Idle mode suspends CPU processing by holding the Program Counter. No program code are fetched
and run in Idle mode. This forces the CPU state to be frozen. The Program Counter (PC), the Stack
Pointer (SP), the Program Status Word (PSW), the Accumulator (ACC), and the other registers hold
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 148 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
their contents during Idle mode. The port pins hold the logical states they had at the time Idle was
activated. Generally it saves considerable power of typical half of the full operating power.
Since the clock provided for peripheral function logic circuit like timer or serial port still remain in Idle
mode, the CPU can be released from the Idle mode using any of the interrupt sources if enabled. The
user can put the device into Idle mode by writing 1 to the bit IDL (PCON.0). The instruction that sets
the IDL bit is the last instruction that will be executed before the device goes into Idle mode.
The Idle mode can be terminated in two ways. First, any interrupt if enabled will cause an exit. This will
automatically clear the IDL bit, terminate the Idle mode, and the interrupt service routine (ISR) will be
executed. After using the RETI instruction to jump out of the ISR, execution of the program will be the
one following the instruction which put the CPU into Idle mode. The second way to terminate the Idle
mode is with any reset other than software reset.
21.2 Power-down Mode
Power-down mode is the lowest power state that N79E715 can enter. It remain the power
consumption as a ”μA” level. This is achieved by stopping the clock system no matter HIRC clock or
external crystal. Both of CPU and peripheral functions like Timers or UART are frozen. Flash memory
stops. All activity is completely stopped and the power consumption is reduced to the lowest possible
value. The device can be put into Power-down mode by writing 1 to bit PD (PCON.1). The instruction
that does this action will be the last instruction to be executed before the device goes into Power-down
mode. In Power-down mode, RAM maintains its content. The port pins output the values held by their
respective.
There are two ways to exit N79E715 from Power-down mode. The first is with all resets except
software reset. BOD reset will also wake up CPU from Power-down mode. Make sure that BOD
detection is enabled before the system enters into Power-down. However, for a principle of least
power consumption, it is uncommon to enable BOD detection in Power-down mode, which is not a
recommended application. Of course, the RST pin reset and power-on reset will remove the Power
Down status. After RST pin reset or power-on reset, the CPU is initialized and starts executing
program code from the beginning.
The N79E715 can be woken up from Power-down mode by forcing an external interrupt pin activated,
providing the corresponding interrupt enabled and the global enable EA bit (IE.7) is set. If these
conditions are met, the trigger on the external pin will asynchronously restart the clock system. Then
device executes the interrupt service routine (ISR) for the corresponding external interrupt. After the
ISR is completed, the program execution returns to the instruction after the one that puts the device
into Power-down mode and continues.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 149 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
BOD, Watchdog and KBI interrupt are other sources to wake up CPU from Power Down. As
mentioned before the user will endure the current of BOD detection circuit. Using KBI interrupt to wake
up CPU from Power Down has a restriction: The KBI pin keeps low (high) before CPU enters Power
Down. Then only rising (falling) edge of KBI Interrupt can wake up CPU from Power Down.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 150 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
22 Clock System
The N79E715 provides three options of the clock system source that is configured by FOSC
(CONFIG3.1~0). It switches the system clock from crystal/resonator, high speed internal RC oscillator
(HIRC), or external clock from XTAL1 pin. The N79E715 is embedded with HIRC selected by CONFIG
setting, factory trimmed to ± 1% under the condition of room temperature and VDD=5V. If the external
clock source is from the crystal, the frequency supports from 4 MHz to 24 MHz.
KBI
Flash
XTAL2
XTAL1
Oscillating
Circuit
FXTAL
0x
Clock FOSC
DIV2
(CONFIG4.0)
Filter
10
Internal RC
Oscillator
(22.1184MHz)
Internal RC
Oscillator
(~10kHz)
0
Turbo 8051
CPU
11
1
1/2
Clock FSYS
Divider
FHIRC
CKF
(CONFIG3.4)
FOSC[1:0]
(CONFIG3[1:0])
OSCFS
(CONFIG3.3)
FLIRC
DIVM
Timers
Serial Port
(UART)
Watchdog
Timer
I2C
PWM
ADC
Figure 22-1 Clock System Block Diagram
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 151 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CONFIG3
7
CWDTEN
R/W
6
CKFS1
R/W
Bit
Name
4
CKF
5
CKFS0
R/W
4
CKF
R/W
3
OSCFS
R/W
2
1
0
FOSC1
FOSC0
R/W
R/W
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Description
Clock Filter Enable
1 = Enable clock filter. It increases noise immunity and EMC capacity.
0 = Disable clock filter.
3
OSCFS
HIRC Frequency Selection
1 = Select 22.1184 MHz as the clock system if HIRC mode is used. It bypasses the
divided-by-2 path of HIRC to select 22.1184 MHz output as the clock system
source.
0 = Select 11.0592 MHz as the clock system if HIRC mode is used. The HIRC
divided-by-2 path is selected. The HIRC is equivalent to 11.0592 MHz output
used as the clock system.
Reserved
2
-
1:0
FOSC1
Oscillator Select Bit
FOSC0
For chip clock source selection, refer to the following table.
(FOSC1, FOSC0)
Chip Clock Source
(1, 1)
HIRC
(1, 0)
Reserved
(0, 1)
(0, 0)
External crystal, 4 MHz ~ 24 MHz
DIVM – Clock Divider Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DIVM[7:0]
R/W
Address: 95H
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Bit
Name
7:0
DIVM[7:0]
Jan. 6, 2016
Description
Clock Divider
The system clock frequency FSYS follows the equation below according to DIVM
value.
FSYS = FOSC, while DIVM = 00H.
1
FSYS =
× FOSC, while DIVM = 01H ~ FFH.
2(DIVM + 1)
Page 152 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
22.1 On-Chip RC Oscillators
The high speed internal RC oscillator of 22.1184 MHz (HIRC) is enabled while FOSC (CONFIG3.1~0)
= [1,1]. It can be selected as the system clock. Setting OSCFS (CONFIG3.3) logic 1 will switch to a
divided-by-2 path. Another low speed on-chip RC oscillator of 10 kHz (LIRC) is only use for watchdog
timer clock source.
22.2 Crystal/Resonator
The crystal/resonator is selected as the system clock while FOSC[1:0] keep programmed as [0:1].
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are the input and output, respectively, of an internal inverting amplifier. A crystal or
resonator can be used by connecting between XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins. The crystal or resonator
frequency from 4 MHz to 24 MHz is allowed. CKF (CONFIG3.4) is the control bit of clock filter circuit of
XTAL1 input pin.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 153 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
23 Power Monitoring
To prevent incorrect execution during power up and power drop, N79E715 provide three power
monitor functions, power-on detection and BOD detection.
23.1 Power-on Detection
The power-on detection function is designed for detecting power up after power voltage reaches to a
level where system can work. After power-on detected, the POF (PCON.4) will be set 1 to indicate a
cold reset, a power-on reset complete. The POF flag can be cleared via software.
23.2 Brown-out Detection
The other power monitoring function, BOD detection circuit is for monitoring the VDD level during
execution. There are two programmable BOD trigger levels available for wide voltage applications.
The two nominal levels are 2.7V and 3.8V selected via setting CBOV in CONFIG2. When VDD drops to
the selected BOD trigger level (VBOD), the BOD detection logic will either reset the CPU or request a
BOD interrupt. The user may determine BOD reset or interrupt enable according to different
application systems.
The BOD detection will request the interrupt while VDD drops below VBOD while BORST (PMCR.4) is 0.
In this case, BOF (PMCR.3) will set as 1. After the user clears this flag whereas VDD remains below
VBOD, BOF will not set again. BOF just acknowledge the user a power drop occurs. The BOF will set 1
after VDD goes higher than VBOD to indicate a power resuming. VBOD has a hysteresis of 20~200mV.
CONFIG2
7
CBODEN
R/W
6
CBOV
R/W
Bit
Name
7
CBODEN
5
-
4
CBORST
R/W
3
-
2
1
0
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Description
CONFIG BOD Detection Enable
1 = Disable BOD detection.
0 = Enable BOD detection.
BODEN is initialized by inverted CBODEN (CONFIG2, bit-7) at any resets.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 154 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
6
CBOV
CONFIG BOD Voltage Selection
This bit select one of two BOD voltage level.
CONFIG-bits
CBOV
1
0
Reserved
5
-
4
CBORST
SFR
BOV
0
1
BOD voltage
Enable BOD= 2.7V
Enable BOD= 3.8V
CONFIG BOD Reset Enable
This bit decides if a BOD reset is caused after a BOD event.
1 = Enable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
0 = Disable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
PMCR – Power Monitoring Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BODEN
BOV
BORST
BOF
BOS
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Address: A3H
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
Description
7
BODEN
BOD-detect Function Control
BODEN is initialized by inverted CBODEN (CONFIG2, bit-7) at any resets.
1 = Enable BOD detection.
0 = Disable BOD detection.
6
BOV
BOD Voltage Select Bits
BOD are initialized at reset with the value of bits CBOV in CONFIG3-bits
BOD Voltage Select bits:
CONFIG-bits
CBOV
1
0
5
-
4
BORST
SFR
BOV
0
1
BOD Voltage
Enable BOD= 2.7V
Enable BOD= 3.8V
Reserved
BOD Reset Enable
This bit decides if a BOD reset is caused after a BOD event.
0 = Disable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
1 = Enable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 155 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
3
BOF
Description
BOD Flag
This flag will be set as logic 1 via hardware after a VDD dropping below or rising
above VBOD event occurs. If both EBOD (IE.5) and EA (IE.7) are set, a BOD
interrupt requirement will be generated. This bit should be cleared via software.
2
-
It should be set to logic 0.
1
-
Reserved
BOD Status
0
BOS
1 = VDD voltage level is higher than VBOD.
0 = VDD voltage level is lower than VBOD.
Note: If BOF is 1 after chip reset, it is strongly recommended to initialize the user program by
clearing BOF.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 156 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
24 Reset Conditions
The N79E715 has several options to place device in reset condition. In general, most SFRs go to their
reset value irrespective of the reset condition, but there are several reset source indication flags
whose state depends on the source of reset. There are 5 ways of putting the device into reset state.
They are power-on reset, RST pin reset, software reset, Watchdog Timer reset, and BOD reset.
24.1 Power-on Reset
The N79E715 incorporates an internal voltage reference. During a power-on process of rising power
supply voltage VDD, this voltage reference will hold the CPU in power-on reset mode when VDD is lower
than the voltage reference threshold. This design makes CPU not access program flash while the VDD
is not adequate performing the flash reading. If an undetermined operating code is read from the
program flash and executed, this will put CPU and even the whole system in to an erroneous state.
After a while, VDD rises above the reference threshold where the system can work, the selected
oscillator will start and then program code will be executed from 0000H. At the same time, a power-on
flag POF (PCON.4) will be set 1 to indicate a cold reset, a power-on reset complete. Note that the
contents of internal RAM will be undetermined after a power-on. It is recommended that user give
initial values for the RAM block. P1.6, P1.7, P1.0 and P1.1 are forced to Quasi-bi-direction type when
chip is in reset state.
It is recommended that the POF be cleared to 0 via software to check if a cold reset or warm reset
performed after the next reset occurs. If a cold reset caused by power off and on, POF will be set 1
again. If the reset is a warm reset caused by other reset sources, POF will remain 0. The user may
take a different course to check other reset flags and deal with the warm reset event.
PCON – Power Control
7
6
SMOD
SMOD0
R/W
R/W
Address: 87H
Bit
Name
4
POF
5
-
4
3
2
1
0
POF
GF1
GF0
PD
IDL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Description
Power-on Reset Flag
This bit will be set as 1 after a power-on reset. It indicates a cold reset, a poweron reset complete. This bit remains its value after any other resets. This flag is
recommended to be cleared via software.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 157 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
24.2 BOD Reset
BOD detection circuit is for monitoring the VDD level during execution. When VDD drops to the selected
BOD trigger level (VBOD) or VDD rises over VBOD , the BOD detection logic will reset the CPU if BORST
(PMCR.4) setting 1.
PMCR – Power Monitoring Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BOS
BODEN
BOV
BORST
BOF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Address: A3H
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
Description
7
BODEN
BOD-detect Function Control
BODEN is initialized by inverted CBODEN (CONFIG2, bit-7) at any resets.
1 = Enable BOD detection.
0 = Disable BOD detection.
6
BOV
BOD Voltage Select Bits
BOD are initialized at reset with the value of bits CBOV in CONFIG3-bits
BOD Voltage Select bits:
CONFIG-bits
CBOV
1
0
5
-
4
BORST
SFR
BOV
0
1
BOD Voltage
Enable BOD= 2.7V
Enable BOD= 3.8V
Reserved
BOD Reset Enable
This bit decides if a BOD reset is caused after a BOD event.
0 = Disable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
1 = Enable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
3
BOF
BOD Flag
This flag will be set as logic 1 via hardware after a VDD dropping below or rising
above VBOD event occurs. If both EBOD (IE.5) and EA (IE.7) are set, a BOD
interrupt requirement will be generated. This bit should be cleared via software.
2
-
It should be set to logic 0.
1
-
Reserved
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 158 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
BOD Status
0
BOS
1 = VDD voltage level is higher than VBOD.
0 = VDD voltage level is lower than VBOD.
24.3 RST Pin Reset
The hardware reset input is RST pin which is the input with a Schmitt trigger. A hardware reset is
accomplished by holding the RST pin low for at least two machine-cycles to ensure detection of a valid
hardware reset signal. The reset circuitry then synchronously applies the internal reset signal. Thus
the reset is a synchronous operation and requires the clock to be running to cause an external reset.
Once the device is in reset condition, it will remain so as long as RST pin is 1. After the RST low is
removed, the CPU will exit the reset state with in two machine-cycles and begin code executing from
address 0000H. There is no flag associated with the RST pin reset condition. However since the other
reset sources have flags, the external reset can be considered as the default reset if those reset flags
are cleared.
If a RST pin reset applies while CPU is in Power-down mode, the way to trigger a hardware reset is
slightly different. Since the Power-down mode stops clock system, the reset signal will asynchronously
cause the clock system resuming. After the clock system is stable, CPU will enter the reset state, then
exit and start to execute program code from address 0000H.
Note: After the CPU is released from all reset state, the hardware will always check the BS bit instead of the
CBS bit to determine from APROM or LDROM that the device reboots.
24.4 Watchdog Timer Reset
The Watchdog Timer is a free running timer with programmable time-out intervals. The user can clear
the Watchdog Timer at any time, causing it to restart the count. When the selected time-out occurs,
the Watchdog Timer will reset the system directly. The reset condition is maintained via hardware for
two machine-cycles. After the reset is removed the device will begin execution from 0000H.
Once a reset due to Watchdog Timer occurs the Watchdog Timer reset flag WDTRF (WDCON0.3) will
be set. This bit keeps unchanged after any reset other than a power-on reset. The user may clear
WDTRF via software.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 159 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
WDCON0 – Watchdog Timer Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDTEN
WDCLR
WDTF
WIDPD
WDTRF
WPS2
WPS1
WPS0
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: D8H
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
3
WDTRF
Description
WDT Reset Flag
When the MCU resets itself, this bit is set by hardware. The bit should be cleared
by software.
If EWRST=0, the interrupt flag WDTRF won’t be set by hardware, and the MCU
will reset itself right away.
If EWRST=1, the interrupt flag WDTRF will be set by hardware and the MCU will
jump into WDT’s interrupt service
routine if WDT interrupt is enabled, and the MCU won’t reset itself until 512 CPU
clocks elapse. In other words, in this condition, the user also needs to clear the
WDT counter (by writing ‘1’ to WDCLR bit) during this period of 512 CPU clocks,
or the MCU will also reset itself when 512 CPU clocks elapse.
WDCON1 – Watchdog Timer Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
Address: ABH
Bit
Name
0
EWRST
3
-
2
-
1
0
EWRST
R/W
Reset value: 0000 0000B
Description
0 = Disable WDT Reset function.
1 = Enable WDT Reset function.
24.5 Software Reset
N79E715 are enhanced with a software reset. This allows the program code to reset the whole system
in software approach. It is quite useful in the end of an ISP progress. For example, if an LDROM
updating APROM ISP finishes and the code in APROM is correctly updated, a software reset can be
asserted to reboot CPU from the APROM to check the result of the updated APROM program code
immediately. Writing 1 to SWRST (CHPCON.7) will trigger a software reset. Note that this bit is timed
access protection. See demo code below.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 160 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CHPCON – Chip Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
ISPF
LDUEN
BS
ISPEN
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 9FH
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
Description
7
SWRST
Software Reset
Setting this bit as logic 1 will cause a software reset. It will automatically be
cleared via hardware after reset in finished.
The software demo code is listed below.
CLR
MOV
MOV
ANL
MOV
MOV
ORL
EA
TA,#0AAh
TA,#55h
CHPCON,#0FDh
TA,#0AAh
TA,#55h
CHPCON,#80h
;If any interrupt is enabled, disable temporarily
;TA protection.
;
;BS = 0, reset to APROM.
;Software reset
24.6 Boot Selection
CONFIG0.7
CHPCON.1
CBS
BS
Load
Watchdog Timer reset
Reset and boot from APROM
Software reset
BS = 0
Brownout reset
Power-on reset
BS = 1
Reset and boot from LDROM
RST-pin reset
Figure 24-1 Boot Selection Diagram
The N79E715 provides user a flexible boot selection for variant application. The SFR bit BS in
CHPCON.1 determines CPU booting from APROM or LDROM after any source of reset. If reset
occurs and BS is 0, CPU will reboot from APPROM. Else, the CPU will reboot from LDROM.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 161 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CONFIG0
7
CBS
R/W
6
-
5
-
4
-
Bit
Name
Description
7
CBS
3
-
2
1
0
LOCK
DFEN
R/W
R/W
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
CONFIG Boot Selection
This bit defines from which block MCU boots after all resets except software reset.
1 = MCU will boot from APROM after all resets except software reset.
0 = MCU will boot from LDROM after all resets except software reset.
CHPCON – Chip Control (TA Protected)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
ISPF
LDUEN
BS[1]
ISPEN
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address: 9FH
Reset value: see Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values
Bit
Name
1
BS
Description
Boot Selection
There are different meanings of writing to or reading from this bit.
Writing:
It defines from which block MCU boots after all resets.
0 = The next rebooting will be from APROM.
1 = The next rebooting will be from LDROM.
Reading:
It indicates from which block MCU booted after previous reset.
0 = The previous rebooting is from APROM.
1 = The previous rebooting is from LDROM.
[1] Note that this bit is initialized by being loaded from the inverted value of CBS bit in CONFIG0.7 at all resets except software
reset. It keeps unchanged after software reset.
Note: After the CPU is released from all reset state, the hardware will always check the BS bit instead of the
CBS bit to determine from APROM or LDROM that the device reboots.
24.7 Reset State
The reset state does not affect the on-chip RAM. The data in the RAM will be preserved during the
reset. Note that the RAM contents may be lost if the VDD falls below approximately 1.2V. This is the
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 162 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
minimum voltage level required for RAM data retention. Therefore, after the power-on reset the RAM
contents will be indeterminate. During a power fail condition. If the power falls below the data retention
minimum voltage, the RAM contents will also lose.
After a reset, most of SFRs go to their initial values except bits which are affected by different reset
events. See the notes in Table 7–2 N79E715 SFR Description and Reset Values. for the initial state of
all SFRs. Some special function registers initial value depends on different reset sources. The
Program Counter is forced to 0000H and held as long as the reset condition is applied. Note that the
Stack Pointer is also reset to 07H, therefore the stack contents may be effectively lost during the reset
event even though the RAM contents are not altered.
After a reset, interrupts and Timers are disabled. The Watchdog Timer is disabled if the reset source
was a power-on reset. The I/O port SFRs have FFH written into them which puts the port pins in a
high state.
Table 24-2 Initial State of SFR Caused by Different Resets
WDCON0
(D8H)
Power-on Reset
Watchdog
Reset
C000 0000B
b7(ENWDT)=
/CENWDT(CONFIG3.
7)
C0Uu 1UUUB
BOD
Reset
Software/
External Reset
C0UU UUUUB
With Time
Access
Protection
Y
WDCON1
(ABH)
0000 0000B
Y
ISPTRG (A4H)
XXXX XXX0B
Y
PMCR (A3H)
CXCC 10XXB
b[7:4]=CONFIG2
CHPCON
(9FH)
0000 00C0B
b1(BS)=/CBS
000X XUU0B
Y
SHBDA (9CH)
CONFIG1
Unchanged
Y
PCON (87H)
0001 000b
UXUU U0XXB
UXUU 10XXB
Y
00uu 0000b
00uu 0000b
(software/External
reset)
00uu 0000b
N
Note: The write of AAH and 55H should occur within 3 machine-cycles of each other. Interrupts
should be disabled during this procedure to avoid delay between the two writes.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 163 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
25 CONFIG Bits (CONFIG)
The N79E715 has several hardware configuration bytes, called CONFIG bits, which are used to
configure the hardware options such as the security bits, clock system source, and so on. These
hardware options can be re-configured through the Programmer/Writer or ISP modes. N79E715 have
four CONFIG bits those are CONFIG0~3. Several functions which are defined by certain CONFIG bits
are also available to be re-configured by certain SFR bits. Therefore, there is a need to LOAD such
CONFIG bits into respective SFR bits. Such loading will occurs after resets. (Software reset will reload
all CONFIG bits except CBS bit in CONFIG0.7) These SFR bits can be continuously controlled via
user’s software. Other resets will remain the values in these SFR bits unchanged.
Note: CONFIG bits marked as "-" should always keep unprogrammed.
25.1 CONFIG0
7
CBS
R/W
6
-
5
-
Bit
Name
Description
7
CBS
4
-
3
-
2
1
0
LOCK
DFEN
R/W
R/W
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
CONFIG Boot Selection
This bit defines from which block MCU boots after all resets except software
reset.
1 = MCU will boot from APROM after all resets except software reset.
0 = MCU will boot from LDROM after all resets except software reset.
6:2
Jan. 6, 2016
-
Reserved
Page 164 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
1
LOCK
Chip Lock Enable
1 = Chip is unlocked. All of APROM, LDROM, and Data Flash are not locked.
Their contents can be read out through a parallel Programmer/Writer.
0 = Chip is locked. APROM, LDROM, and Data Flash are locked. Their contents
read through parallel Programmer/Writer will become FFH.
Note that CONFIG bytes are always unlocked and can be read. Hence, once the
chip is locked, the CONFIG bytes cannot be erased or programmed individually.
The only way to disable chip lock is to use the whole chip erase mode. However,
all data within APROM, LDROM, Data Flash, and other CONFIG bits will be
erased when this procedure is executed.
If the chip is locked, it does not alter the ISP function.
0
Data Flash Enable
DFEN
1 = There is no Data Flash space. The APROM size is 16 Kbytes.
0 = Data Flash exists. The Data Flash and APROM share 16 Kbytes depending
on SHBDA settings.
CONFIG0
CHPCON
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CBS
-
-
-
-
-
LOCK
DFEN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
ISPF
LDUE
-
-
-
BS
ISPEN
Figure 25-1 CONFIG0 Reset Reloading Except Software Reset
25.2 CONFIG1
7
6
5
4
3
CHBDA[7:0][1]
R/W
2
1
0
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Bit
Name
7:0
CHBDA[7:0]
Description
CONFIG High Byte of Data Flash Starting Address
This byte is valid only when DFEN (CONFIG0.0) is 0. It is used to determine
the starting address of the Data Flash.
[1]: There will be no APROM if setting CHBDA 00H. CPU will execute codes in minimum size(256B) of internal
Program Memory.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 165 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
CONFIG1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
1
0
CHBDA[7:0]
SHBDA
7
6
5
4
3
SHBDA[7:0]
Figure 25-2 CONFIG1 Reset Reloading
25.3 CONFIG2
7
CBODEN
R/W
6
CBOV
R/W
Bit
Name
7
CBODEN
5
-
4
CBORST
R/W
3
-
2
1
0
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Description
CONFIG BOD Detection Enable
1 = Disable BOD detection.
0 = Enable BOD detection.
BODEN is initialized by inverted CBODEN (CONFIG2, bit-7) at any resets.
6
CBOV
CONFIG BOD Voltage Selection
This bit selects one of two BOD voltage level.
5
-
4
CBORST
CONFIG-bits
CBOV
1
0
Reserved
SFR
BOV
0
1
BOD Voltage
Enable BOD= 2.7V
Enable BOD= 3.8V
CONFIG BOD Reset Enable
This bit decides if a BOD reset is caused after a BOD event.
1 = Enable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
0 = Disable BOD reset when VDD drops below VBOD.
3:0
Jan. 6, 2016
-
Reserved
Page 166 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CBODEN
CBOV
-
CBORST
-
-
-
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BODEN
BOV
-
BORST
BOF
-
-
BOS
CONFIG2
PMCR
Figure 25-3 CONFIG2 Reset Reloading
25.4 CONFIG3
7
CWDTEN
R/W
6
-
5
-
Bit
Name
7
CWDTEN
4
CKF
R/W
3
OSCFS
R/W
2
1
0
FOSC1
FOSC0
R/W
R/W
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Description
CONFIG Watchdog Timer Enable
1 = Disable Watchdog Timer after all resets.
0 = Enable Watchdog Timer after all resets.
WDTEN is initialized by inverted CWDTEN (CONFIG3, bit-7) at any other resets.
6
-
Reserved
5
-
Reserved
4
CKF
Clock Filter Enable
1 = Enable clock filter. It increases noise immunity and EMC capacity.
0 = Disable clock filter.
3
OSCFS
HIRC Frequency Selection
1 = Select 22.1184 MHz as the clock system if HIRC mode is used. It bypasses the
divided-by-2 path of HIRC to select 22.1184 MHz output as the clock system
source.
0 = Select 11.0592 MHz as the clock system if HIRC mode is used. The HIRC
divided-by-2 path is selected. The HIRC is equivalent to 11.0592 MHz output
used as the clock system.
2
-
1
FOSC1
Jan. 6, 2016
Reserved
Oscillator Select Bit
Page 167 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Bit
Name
Description
0
FOSC0
Chip Clock Source Selection (See the Following Table)
(FOSC1, FOSC0)
Chip Clock Source
(1, 1)
HIRC
(1, 0)
Reserved
(0, 0)
(0, 1)
External crystal, 4 MHz ~ 24 MHz
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CWDTEN
-
-
CKF
OSCFS
-
FOSC1
FOSC0
CONFIG3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDTEN
WDCLR
WDTF
WIDPD
WDTRF
WPS2
WPS1
WPS0
WDCON0
Figure 25-4 CONFIG3 Reset Reloading
25.5 CONFIG4
7
RSTDBE
R/W
Bit
7
6
6
RSTDBS
R/W
Name
RSTDBE
RSTDBS
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
1
0
DIV2
R/W
Factory default value: 1111 1111B
Description
Reset pin de-bounce time expend
If RSTDBE = 0, reset pin de-bounce time depends on RSTDBS.
1 = Reset pin de-bounce time is default value (8 FSYS clock).
0 = Reset pin de-bounce time depends on RSTDBS.
Reset pin de-bounce selection
1 = Reset pin de-bounce time is 16 FSYS clock.
0 = Reset pin de-bounce time is 32 FSYS clock.
RSTDBE
RSTDBS
Reset pin de-bounce time
5:1
-
0
DIV2
1
x
8 FSYS clock
0
1
16 FSYS clock
0
0
32 FSYS clock
Reserved
System clock divided by 2
1 = FSYS is equal to FOSC
0 = FSYS is equal to FOSC/2
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 168 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
26 Instruction Sets
The N79E715 executes all the instructions of the standard 8051 family. All instructions are coded
within an 8-bit field called an OPCODE. This single byte should be fetched from Program Memory.
The OPCODE is decoded by the CPU. It determines what action the microcontroller will take and
whether more operation data is needed from memory. If no other data is needed, then only one byte
was required. Thus the instruction is called a one byte instruction. In some cases, more data is
needed. These will be two or three byte instructions.
Table 26–1 lists all instructions in details. The note of the instruction sets and addressing modes are
shown below.
Rn (n = 0~7)
Register R0~R7 of the currently selected Register Bank.
Direct 8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be an internal data
RAM location (0~127) or a SFR (e.g. I/O port, control register, status
register, etc.) (128~255).
@Ri (i = 0, 1)
regis-
8-bit internal data RAM location (0~255) addressed indirectly through
ter R0 or R1.
#data
8-bit constant included in the instruction.
#data16
16-bit constant included in the instruction.
addr16
16-bit destination address. Used by LCALL and LJMP. A branch can be
within the 16 Kbytes Program Memory address space.
addr11
11-bit destination address. Used by ACALL and AJMP. The branch will be
within the same 2 Kbytes page of Program Memory as the first
any
byte of the
following instruction.
Signed (2’s complement) 8-bit offset byte. Used by SJMP and all
branches. The range is -128 to +127 bytes relative to first
of
the
following instruction.
rel
conditional
byte
bit
Direct addressed bit in internal data RAM or SFR.
Table 26–1 Instruction Set for N79E715
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
N79E715 vs. Tradition
80C51 Speed Ratio
00
1
4
3.0
Instruction
NOP
OPCODE
ADD
A, Rn
28~2F
1
4
3.0
ADD
A, @Ri
26, 27
1
4
3.0
ADD
A, direct
25
2
8
1.5
ADD
A, #data
24
2
8
1.5
ADDC
A, Rn
38~3F
1
4
3.0
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 169 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 26–1 Instruction Set for N79E715
Instruction
OPCODE
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
N79E715 vs. Tradition
80C51 Speed Ratio
ADDC
A, @Ri
36, 37
1
4
3.0
ADDC
A, direct
35
2
8
1.5
ADDC
A, #data
34
2
8
1.5
SUBB
A, Rn
98~9F
1
4
3.0
SUBB
A, @Ri
96, 97
1
4
3.0
SUBB
A, direct
95
2
8
1.5
SUBB
A, #data
94
2
8
1.5
INC
A
04
1
4
3.0
INC
Rn
08~0F
1
4
3.0
INC
@Ri
06, 07
1
4
3.0
INC
direct
05
2
8
1.5
INC
DPTR
A3
1
8
3.0
DEC
A
14
1
4
3.0
DEC
Rn
18~1F
1
4
3.0
DEC
@Ri
16, 17
1
4
3.0
DEC
direct
15
2
8
1.5
DEC
DPTR
A5
1
8
-
MUL
AB
A4
1
20
2.4
DIV
AB
84
1
20
2.4
DA
A
D4
1
4
3.0
ANL
A, Rn
58~5F
1
4
3.0
ANL
A, @Ri
56, 57
1
4
3.0
ANL
A, direct
55
2
8
1.5
ANL
A, #data
54
2
8
1.5
ANL
direct, A
52
2
8
1.5
ANL
direct, #data
53
3
12
2.0
ORL
A, Rn
48~4F
1
4
3.0
ORL
A, @Ri
46, 47
1
4
3.0
ORL
A, direct
45
2
8
1.5
ORL
A, #data
44
2
8
1.5
ORL
direct, A
42
2
8
1.5
ORL
direct, #data
43
3
12
2.0
XRL
A, Rn
68~6F
1
4
3.0
XRL
A, @Ri
66, 67
1
4
3.0
XRL
A, direct
65
2
8
1.5
XRL
A, #data
64
2
8
1.5
XRL
direct, A
62
2
8
1.5
XRL
direct, #data
63
3
12
2.0
CLR
A
E4
1
4
3.0
CPL
A
F4
1
4
3.0
RL
A
23
1
4
3.0
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 170 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 26–1 Instruction Set for N79E715
Instruction
OPCODE
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
N79E715 vs. Tradition
80C51 Speed Ratio
RLC
A
33
1
4
3.0
RR
A
03
1
4
3.0
RRC
A
13
1
4
3.0
SWAP
A
C4
1
4
3.0
MOV
A, Rn
E8~EF
1
4
3.0
MOV
A, @Ri
E6, E7
1
4
3.0
MOV
A, direct
E5
2
8
1.5
MOV
A, #data
74
2
8
1.5
MOV
Rn, A
F8~FF
1
4
3.0
MOV
Rn, direct
A8~AF
2
8
3.0
MOV
Rn, #data
78~7F
2
8
1.5
MOV
@Ri, A
F6, F7
1
4
3.0
MOV
@Ri, direct
A6, A7
2
8
3.0
MOV
@Ri, #data
76, 77
2
8
1.5
MOV
direct, A
F5
2
8
1.5
MOV
direct, Rn
88~8F
2
8
3.0
MOV
direct, @Ri
86, 87
2
8
3.0
MOV
direct, direct
85
3
12
2.0
MOV
direct, #data
75
3
12
2.0
MOV
DPTR, #data16
90
3
12
2.0
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
93
1
8
3.0
MOVC A, @A+PC
83
1
8
3.0
E2, E3
1
8
3.0
E0
1
8
3.0
F2, F3
1
8
3.0
F0
1
8
3.0
[1]
MOVX
A, @Ri
MOVX
A, @DPTR
[1]
[1]
MOVX
@Ri, A
MOVX
@DPTR, A
PUSH
direct
C0
2
8
3.0
POP
direct
D0
2
8
3.0
XCH
A, Rn
C8~CF
1
4
3.0
XCH
A, @Ri
C6, C7
1
4
3.0
XCH
A, direct
C5
2
8
1.5
XCHD
A, @Ri
D6, D7
1
4
3.0
CLR
C
C3
1
4
3.0
CLR
bit
C2
2
8
1.5
SETB
C
D3
1
4
3.0
SETB
bit
D2
2
8
1.5
CPL
C
B3
1
4
3.0
CPL
bit
B2
2
8
1.5
ANL
C, bit
82
2
8
3.0
ANL
C, /bit
B0
2
8
3.0
ORL
C, bit
72
2
8
3.0
Jan. 6, 2016
[1]
Page 171 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 26–1 Instruction Set for N79E715
Instruction
OPCODE
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
N79E715 vs. Tradition
80C51 Speed Ratio
ORL
C, /bit
A0
2
8
3.0
MOV
C, bit
A2
2
8
1.5
MOV
bit, C
92
2
8
3.0
ACALL addr11
11, 31, 51, 71, 91,
[2]
B1, D1, F1
2
12
2.0
LCALL addr16
12
3
16
1.5
RET
22
1
8
3.0
RETI
32
1
8
3.0
AJMP
addr11
01, 21, 41, 61, 81,
A1, C1, E1
2
12
2.0
LJMP
addr16
02
3
16
1.5
JMP
@A+DPTR
73
1
8
3.0
SJMP
rel
80
2
12
2.0
JZ
rel
60
2
12
2.0
JNZ
rel
70
2
12
2.0
JC
rel
40
2
12
2.0
JNC
rel
50
2
12
2.0
JB
bit, rel
20
3
16
1.5
JNB
bit, rel
30
3
16
1.5
JBC
bit, rel
10
3
16
1.5
CJNE
A, direct, rel
B5
3
16
1.5
CJNE
A, #data, rel
B4
3
16
1.5
CJNE
@Ri, #data, rel
B6, B7
3
16
1.5
CJNE
Rn, #data, rel
B8~BF
3
16
1.5
DJNZ
Rn, rel
D8~DF
2
12
2.0
DJNZ
direct, rel
D5
3
16
1.5
[1] The most three significant bits in the 11-bit address [A10:A8] decide the ACALL hex code. The code will
be [A10,A9,A8,1,0,0,0,1].
[2] The most three significant bits in the 11-bit address [A10:A8] decide the AJMP hex code. The code will
be [A10,A9,A8,0,0,0,0,1].
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 172 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
27 In-Circuit Program (ICP)
The ICP (In-Circuit-Program) mode is another approach to access the Flash EPROM. There are only
3 pins needed to perform the ICP function. One is input /RST pin, which should be fed to GND in the
ICP working period. One is clock input, shared with P1.7, which accepts serial clock from external
device. Another is data I/O pin, shared with P1.6, that an external ICP program tool shifts in/out data
via P1.6 synchronized with clock(P1.7) to access the Flash EPROM of N79E715.
Upon entering ICP program mode, all pins will be set to quasi-bidirectional mode, and output to level
“1”. The N79E715 supports Flash EPROM (16 Kbytes APROM EPROM), Data Flash memory (128
bytes per page) and LDROM programming. User can select to program the APROM, Data Flash and
LDROM.
Vcc
ICP Power
ICP Connector
RST
*
Clock
P1.7
*
VDD
VDD
*
Data
P1.6
*
VPP
Switch
ICP
Writer Tool
Jumper
Vss
App. device
App. device
App. device
Vss
N79E715
System Board
*: Resistor is optional by application
Figure 27–1 ICP Connection with N79E715
Note:
1. When using ICP to upgrade code, the /RST, P1.6 and P1.7 should be taken within design system board.
2. After program finished by ICP, to suggest system power should power off and remove ICP connector then
power on.
3. It is recommended that user perform erase function and programming configure bits continuously without any
interruption.
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 173 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
User may refer to the following website for ICP Program Tool. Entry the web site, please select
“Nuvoton ISP-ICP Programmer”.
http://www.nuvoton.com/hq/products/microcontrollers/8bit-8051-mcus/Software
Figure 27–2 Nuvoton ISP-ICP Programmer
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 174 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
28 Electrical Characteristics
28.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 28–1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Rating
Unit
Operating temperature under bias
-40 to +85
C
Storage temperature range
-55 to +150
C
Voltage on VDD pin to VSS
-0.3 to +6.5
V
Voltage on any other pin to VSS
-0.3 to (VDD+0.3)
V
Stresses at or above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage
to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other
conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied.
Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions may affect device reliability.
28.2 DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 28–2 Operation Voltage
Parameter
Sym
Operating Voltage
VDD
MIN
TYP
MAX
Conditions
5.5
FXTAL = 4 MHz ~24 MHz
2.4
ISP Operating
Voltage
VDD
Unit
V
2.4
5.5
FHIRC = 22.1184 MHz
3.0
5.5
FXTAL = 4 MHz ~ 24 MHz
V
Table 28–3 DC Characteristics
(VDDVSS = 2.4~5.5V, TA = -40C ~+85C, unless otherwise specified.)
Sym
Parameter
Test Conditions
MIN
TYP
MAX
Unit
SVDD
VDD Rise Rate to ensure
internal Power-on Reset
signal
See section on Power-on
Reset for details
0.05[5]
-
-
V/ms
Jan. 6, 2016
Page 175 of 189
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 28–3 DC Characteristics
(VDDVSS = 2.4~5.5V, TA = -40C ~+85C, unless otherwise specified.)
Sym
Parameter
Test Conditions
MIN
VIL
Input Low Voltage
(general purpose I/O with TTL
input)
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
VIL1
Input Low Voltage
(general purpose I/O with
Schmitt trigger
input)
TYP
MAX
Unit
-0.5
0.2VDD-0.1
V
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
-0.5
0.3VDD
V
VIL2
Input Low Voltage
(/RST, XTAL1)
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
-0.5
0.2VDD-0.1
V
VIH
Input High Voltage
(general purpose I/O with TTL
input)
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
0.2VDD+0.9
VDD+0.5
V
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
0.7VDD
VDD+0.5
V
2.4 < VDD < 5.5V
0.7VDD
VDD+0.5
V
VDD=4.5V,
IOL= 20mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VDD=3.0V,
IOL= 14mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VDD=2.4V,
IOL= 10mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VDD=4.5V,
IOL= 38mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VDD =3.0V,
IOL= 27mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VDD =2.4V,
IOL= 20mA[2], [3]
0.45
V
VIH1
Input High Voltage
(general purpose I/O with
Schmitt trigger
input)
Input High Voltage
(/RST, XTAL1)
VIH2
VOL
VOL1
VOH
Output Low Voltage
(general purpose I/O of
P0,P2,P3, all modes except
input only)
Output Low Voltage
(P10, P11, P14, P16, P17)
( All modes except input only)
Output High Voltage
(general purpose I/O, quasi
bidirectional)
Jan. 6, 2016
VDD=4.5V
IOH= -380μA[3]
VDD=3.0V
IOH= -90μA[3]
Page 176 of 189
2.4
2.4
V
V
Revision 1.01
N79E715 Datasheet
Table 28–3 DC Characteristics
(VDDVSS = 2.4~5.5V, TA = -40C ~+85C, unless otherwise specified.)
Sym
VOH1
Parameter
Output High Voltage
(general purpose I/O, push-pull)
Test Conditions
MIN
TYP
MAX
Unit
VDD=2.4V
IOH= -48μA[3]
2.0
V
VDD=4.5V
IOH= -28mA[2], [3]
2.4
V
VDD=3.0V
IOH= -7mA[2], [3]
2.4
V
VDD=2.4V
IOH= -3.5mA[2], [3]
2.0
V
I IL
Logical 0 Input Current
(general purpose I/O, quasi bidirection)
VDD=5.5V, VIN = 0.4V
-40 at 5.5V
-50
μA
ITL
Logical 1 to 0 Transition Current
(general purpose I/O, quasi bidirection)
VDD = 5.5V, VIN = 2.0V[1]
-550 at 5.5V
-650
μA
I LI
Input Leakage Current
(general purpose I/O, opendrain or input only)
0 < VIN < VDD
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
